JP6692244B2 - Amusement machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a ballistic pachinko gaming machine.

  The pachinko game machine includes a main control board that controls the progress of the game, and a production control board that controls the production of the game through the liquid crystal display on the game board surface and the control of the accessory. In the Pachinko game machine, during the variable display of the special symbols and during the special game, the player is prompted to operate the effect button, and the operation effect that advances the effect when the operation of the effect button is performed There is something to do. As a document disclosing a technique related to the rendering of this type of gaming machine, there is Patent Document 1.

JP, 2011-98143, A

  By the way, the operation effect of this type of gaming machine is nothing more than a drop of an accessory or the appearance of a character triggered by the operation of the effect button, and there is room for improvement in terms of the entertainment of the game.

  The present invention has been made in view of such problems, and an object of the present invention is to further enhance the interest of a game in a gaming machine.

  In order to solve the above problems, the gaming machine of the present invention has an operating means, a determining means for determining whether or not a jackpot is won by the establishment of a start condition, and a symbol display based on the determination result of the determining means. After variably displaying the symbols in the means, the symbol display control means for stopping and displaying the symbols indicating the determination result, and when the determination means determines that the jackpot is won, the symbol display control means stops the symbols After displaying, a special game execution means for executing a special game corresponding to the winning jackpot, a predetermined reach effect based on the determination result of the determination means, a development effect that develops from the reach effect, and an operation reception The first operation effect and the second operation effect that advance according to a predetermined operation on the operation means within the effective period, and the mode of the progress of the effect after the operation are suggested. The production control means for causing the production means to execute one or a plurality of productions among the plurality of productions including the fixed notice production, and the production control means, while the variable display of the symbol is executed, executes the first operation production. When performing, the execution of the specific notice effect is restricted before the execution of the first operation effect, and when executing the second operation effect, the specific notice effect is executed before the execution of the second operation effect. The second operation effect is a notification condition that a predetermined operation is performed on the operation means within the operation reception effective period, and the operation reception is effective. There is provided a gaming machine characterized in that it is a one-shot operation effect that notifies the development to the development effect immediately after the predetermined operation within a period.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the operation effect of the game machine.

It is a front view of the gaming machine which is the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a perspective view of the back side of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows a mode that the 1st movable accessory 330a in the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1 descended. It is a figure which shows a mode that the 2nd movable accessory 330b in the game machine shown in FIG. 1 tilted. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a diagram showing the relationship between the type of jackpot in the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1 and a combination of a left symbol 36L, a middle symbol 36C, a right symbol 36R, and a fourth symbol 36Z. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the photo image of each step in the step-up production of the game machine shown in FIG. 1, a frame color, and the reliability of a jackpot. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing of the main control board of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process of the main control board of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the input control processing of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st starting opening detection switch input processing of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the special symbol reservation storage area of the main control board of the game machine which shows in Figure 1 and the production information storage area of the production control board. It is a figure which shows the prior determination table of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a flow chart which shows the special figure special electric power control processing of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart showing a special symbol storage determination process of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart showing a jackpot determination process of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a diagram showing a jackpot determination table and a normal symbol lottery determination table of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the symbol determination table of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation pattern determination table of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation pattern determination table of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart showing a special symbol variation process of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart showing a special symbol stop process of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the special game control table of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the special winning opening opening and closing control table of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart showing a jackpot game process of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart showing a jackpot game ending process of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the special game end time setting table of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the universal-universal-university electric power control process of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process of the production control board of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process of the production control board of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the command analysis process of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the command analysis process of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the command analysis process of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a diagram showing a variation effect pattern determination table of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is the flowchart which shows the pre-reading reservation change production selection processing of the production control baseplate of the game machine which is shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the look-ahead hold display change effect execution determination table and the final stage hold display mode determination table of the effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the hold display change production scenario determination table of the production control board of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the hold display change production scenario determination table of the production control board of the game machine shown in FIG. It is the flowchart which shows the production design decision processing of the production control baseplate of the game machine which is shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st accessory operation specific notice production selection processing of the production control board of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the 1st accessory operation specific notice production execution determination table of the production control board of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd accessory operation specific notice production selection processing of the production control board of the game machine shown in Drawing 1. It is a figure which shows the 2nd accessory operation specific notice production execution determination table of the production control board of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart showing a step-up effect selection process of an effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the step-up production execution determination table and the step-up production final stage determination table of the production control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the step-up production scenario determination table of the production control board of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a flow chart which shows the dialogue operation production selection processing of the production control board of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the dialogue operation production execution determination table and the dialogue operation production progress mode determination table of the production control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the dialogue operation specific notice production selection processing of the production control board of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the dialogue operation specific notice production execution determination table of the production control board of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a flow chart which shows the roulette operation production selection processing of the production control board of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a diagram showing a roulette operation effect execution determination table and a roulette operation effect progress mode determination table of the effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the roulette operation specific notice production selection processing of the production control board of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the roulette operation specific notice production execution determination table of the production control board of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the gauge operation production selection process of the production control board of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the gauge operation production execution determination table of the production control board of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the reference destination determination table of the effect control board of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the high-order tables 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 of the effect control board of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the middle level table and the subordinate table of the production | generation control board of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the gauge operation production progress pattern determination table of the production control board of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the gauge operation specific notice production selection process of the production control board of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the gauge operation specific notice production execution determination table of the production control board of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the timing operation production selection process of the production control board of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the timing operation production execution determination table of the production control board of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the timing operation production progress mode determination table of the production control board of the game machine shown in FIG. It is the flowchart which shows the reach back button operation production selection processing of the production control baseplate of the game machine which is shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the reach back button operation production progress mode determination table of the production control board of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart showing a step-up back button operation effect selection process of the effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the step-up back button operation production progress mode determination table of the production control board of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a flow chart which shows the special game production selection processing of the production control board of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a flow chart which shows the round game production control processing of the production control board of the game machine shown in FIG. It is the flowchart which shows the production input control processing of the production control baseplate of the game machine which is shown in FIG. It is the flowchart which shows the production input control processing of the production control baseplate of the game machine which is shown in FIG. It is the flowchart which shows the production input control processing of the production control baseplate of the game machine which is shown in FIG. It is the flowchart which shows the production input control processing of the production control baseplate of the game machine which is shown in FIG. It is the flowchart which shows the production input control processing of the production control baseplate of the game machine which is shown in FIG. It is the flowchart which shows the production input control processing of the production control baseplate of the game machine which is shown in FIG. It is the flowchart which shows the production input control processing of the production control baseplate of the game machine which is shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the content of the operation information storage area of the production control board of the game machine shown in FIG. 1, and its update example. It is a figure showing an example of production of a game machine which is a 2nd embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing a gauge operation specific notice production execution judgment table of a game machine which is a 2nd embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the 2nd accessory operation specific notice production execution determination table of the game machine which is 2nd Embodiment of this invention.

<First Embodiment>
FIG. 1 is a front view of a gaming machine 1 according to a first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the back side of the gaming machine 1. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing the overall configuration of the gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. 1, the housing of the gaming machine 1 has a rectangular outer frame 60 and a glass door 50 that visually covers the game area 6 of the outer frame 60.

  One end of the glass door 50 (on the left facing the gaming machine 1) is connected to the outer frame 60 via a hinge mechanism 51. A lock mechanism is provided at the other end of the glass door 50 (on the right side facing the gaming machine 1). When the lock mechanism of the glass door 50 is unlocked with a dedicated key, the glass door 50 can be swung by the hinge mechanism portion 51 to open the game area 6. The glass door 50 is provided with a door opening switch 18a that detects opening of the glass door 50.

  Outside the part that covers the game area 6 in the glass door 50, the first special symbol display device 20, the second special symbol display device 21, the first special symbol reservation display 23, the second special symbol reservation display 24, ordinary A symbol display device 22 and a normal symbol hold indicator 25 are provided.

  The first special symbol display device 20 informs the lottery result of the jackpot lottery that has been triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first start opening 14 of the game area 6 (hereinafter, referred to as "start prize" as appropriate). Is. The second special symbol display device 21 notifies the lottery result of the jackpot lottery that is triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second start opening 15 of the game area 6 (hereinafter, appropriately referred to as "start prize"). is there. The first special symbol display device 20 and the second special symbol display device 21 variably display a plurality of types of special symbols that can be identified. The first special symbol display device 20 and the second special symbol display device 21 are composed of 7-segment LEDs. In the following description, the special symbols that are variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 20 are appropriately called "first special symbols", and the special symbols that are variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 21 are appropriately "second special symbols". Design ”.

  The first special symbol hold display 23 is for displaying the number of holding changes of the first special symbol. The second special symbol hold display 24 is to display the number of holding changes of the second special symbol.

  Here, the suspension of the variation of the first special symbol, the starting condition for executing the variation of the first special symbol by the start winning of the first starting opening 14 is satisfied, but is based on the satisfaction of the previously established starting condition. Occurs when the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is being executed or when the special game is being executed.

  Similarly, the suspension of the variation of the second special symbol, the starting condition for executing the variation of the second special symbol is satisfied by the start winning of the second starting port 15, but is based on the satisfaction of the previously established starting condition. Occurs when the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is being executed or when the special game is being executed.

  Each of the first special symbol hold indicator 23 and the second special symbol hold indicator 24 is composed of two left and right LEDs. When the display mode of the number of holds in the first special symbol hold display 23 and the second special symbol hold display 24 is specifically described, in the first special symbol hold display 23, the number of held changes of the first special symbol is In the case of one, the left LED lights up. When the number of pending changes of the first special symbol is two, the right LED is turned on. When the number of pending changes in the first special symbol is three, the left LED blinks and the right LED lights up. When the number of pending changes in the first special symbol is four, the left and right two LEDs blink. The display mode of the number of reservations in the second special symbol reservation display 24 is the same as that of the first special symbol reservation display 23.

  The normal symbol display device 22 is for notifying the lottery result of the normal symbol lottery which is carried out when the game ball passes through the normal symbol gate 13. The normal symbol display device 22 variably displays a plurality of types of normal symbols that can be identified. The normal symbol hold display 25 is for displaying the number of holding changes of the normal symbol. The normal symbol hold display 25 is composed of two LEDs on the left and right. The display mode of the number of reservations in the normal symbol reservation display 25 is the same as that of the first special symbol reservation display 23 and the second special symbol reservation display 24.

  The game area 6 of the gaming machine 1 has a substantially oval shape. The game area 6 is divided into a left area 6L on the left side and a right area 6R on the right side of the center in the left-right direction. At the left end of the left region 6L, rails 5a, 5b extending in an arc shape are provided between each other with a space slightly wider than the game ball. A ball return prevention piece 5c is provided at the upper end of the inner rail 5b of the rails 5a and 5b.

  On the upper side of the glass door 50 of the gaming machine 1, slightly inside the left and right corners, three left and right effect lighting devices (lamps) 34 are provided. The production lighting device 34 produces a game by emitting light under the control of the lamp control board 140.

  A sound output device 32 (speaker) is provided inside each of the three left and right effect lighting devices 34 in the upper part of the glass door 50 of the gaming machine 1. Under the control of the image control board 150, the audio output device 32 produces an effect of the game by sound (output of various background music (BGM) and output of sound effect).

  Below the portion of the glass door 50 that covers the game area 6, the effect button 35 is provided. The effect button 35 is for changing the effect mode by a pressing operation. The effect button 35 is provided with an effect button detection switch 35a. When the production button detection switch 35a detects that the production button 35 has been pressed, it outputs an ON signal indicating this.

  A cross key 39 is provided to the left of the effect button 35. The cross key 39 includes an up cursor key 39A, a down cursor key 39B, a left cursor key 39C, and a right cursor key 39D. A center key 39E is provided at a position surrounded by the up cursor key 39A, the down cursor key 39B, the left cursor key 39C, and the right cursor key 39D.

  The up cursor key 39A, the down cursor key 39B, the left cursor key 39C, and the right cursor key 39D of the cross key 39 are provided with cross key detection switches 39a, 39b, 39c, and 39d. The central key 39E is provided with a central key detection switch 39e. When the cross key detection switch 39a detects that the up cursor key 39A is pressed, it outputs an ON signal indicating this. When the cross key detection switch 39b detects that the down cursor key 39B is pressed, it outputs an ON signal indicating that. When the cross key detection switch 39c detects that the left cursor key 39C is pressed, it outputs an ON signal indicating that. When the cross key detection switch 39d detects that the right cursor key 39D is pressed, it outputs an ON signal indicating that. When the central key detection switch 39e detects that the central key 39E is pressed, it outputs an ON signal indicating that.

  On the back side of the effect button 35 in the glass door 50, a saucer for storing game balls is provided. The operation handle 3 is provided at the lower right of the effect button 35 on the glass door 50. The player performs a shooting operation, which is an operation of gripping the operation handle 3 with his / her right hand and rotating it clockwise.

  A touch sensor 3 a is provided in the operation handle 3. The touch sensor 3a is composed of an electrostatic capacitance type proximity switch that utilizes a change in electrostatic capacitance caused by the player touching the operation handle 3. A ball feed solenoid 4b is provided on the tray of the glass door 50. The ball feeding solenoid 4b is composed of a straight advance solenoid. A firing volume 3b and a firing solenoid 4a are provided near the rotating portion of the operation handle 3. The firing volume 3b is composed of a variable resistor. The firing solenoid 4a is composed of a rotary solenoid.

  Each of these parts 3a, 3b, 4a, 4b performs an operation related to the launch of the game ball in the saucer to the game area 6 under the control of the launch control board 160. More specifically, when the player's hand touches the operation handle 3, the touch sensor 3a supplies a touch signal indicating this to the firing control board 160. When the player's hand turns the operation handle 3, the firing volume 3 b outputs a voltage divided according to the rotation amount of the operation handle 3 to the firing control board 160. The firing control board 160 controls to energize the firing solenoid 4a and the ball feeding solenoid 4b based on the output voltage of the firing volume 3b while the touch signal is supplied from the touch sensor 3a.

  By controlling the energization of the firing control board 160, the ball feeding solenoid 4b feeds the game balls in the tray one by one toward the launching member directly connected to the firing solenoid 4a. The firing solenoid 4a rotates the driving member. The game ball sent from the tray toward the hitting member is hit between the rails 5a and 5b by the rotation of the hitting member, and is guided to the rails 5a and 5b to rise. The game ball that has risen between the rails 5a and 5b passes through the ball return prevention piece 5c, reaches the game area 6, and falls in the game area 6 unpredictably.

  Here, the rotation speed of the firing solenoid 4a is set to about 99.9 (times / minute) from the frequency based on the output cycle of the crystal oscillator provided on the firing control board 160. As a result, the number of shots in one minute is about 99.9 (pieces / minute) because one shot is made each time the firing solenoid 4a makes one rotation. That is, one game ball is shot about every 0.6 seconds.

  On the upper part of the game area 6, a decoration member 7 that affects the flow of the game balls is provided. At the back of the decorative member 7 in the upper part of the game area 6 and at the right end of the game area 6, effect drive devices 33a and 33b are provided. Under the control of the lamp control board 140, the production drive devices 33a and 33b produce a game by the movement of the device itself. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, the production drive device 33a includes an annular first movable accessory 330a and an actuator that supports the upper edge thereof. When the effect drive device 33b receives a signal instructing to drive the first movable accessory 330a from the lamp control board 140, the effect drive device 33b is located on the back side of the decorative member 7 above the game area 6 (the position shown in FIG. 1). The first movable accessory 330a is lowered to the center position (the position shown in FIG. 4) of the game area 6. As shown in FIG. 5, the production drive device 33b has a stick-shaped second movable accessory 330b and an actuator that supports the lower end thereof. When the effect drive device 33b receives a signal instructing the driving of the second movable accessory 330b from the lamp control board 140, the second movable accessory 330b is moved from the right end position of the game area 6 (the position shown in FIG. 1). The game area 6 is tilted toward the center position (the position shown in FIG. 5).

  Below the left area 6L in the game area 6, a plurality of general winning openings 12 are provided. The general winning opening 12 is provided with a general winning opening detection switch 12a for detecting passage of a game ball through the general winning opening 12. When the general winning opening detection switch 12a detects the passage of the game balls, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls are paid out.

  The first special winning opening 16 is provided below the right area 6R in the game area 6. The first special winning opening 16 has a horizontally long rectangular shape. The first special winning opening 16 is provided with a first special winning opening detection switch 16a for detecting the entry of a game ball in the first special winning opening 16. When the first special winning opening detection switch 16a detects the entry of a game ball, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out.

  The first special winning opening 16 is provided with a first special winning opening opening / closing door 16b, which is a special electric accessory, and a first special winning opening opening / closing solenoid 16c for opening / closing the first special winning opening opening / closing door 16b. There is. The first special winning opening opening / closing door 16b has a rectangular plate shape having substantially the same size as the first special winning opening 16. The lower edge of the first special winning opening opening / closing door 16b is pivotally attached to the lower edge of the first special winning opening 16 so as to be swingable. When the first special winning opening opening / closing solenoid 16c is turned off, the first special winning opening opening / closing door 16b stands up substantially flush with the board surface of the game area 6 and closes the first special winning opening 16. When the first special winning opening opening / closing solenoid 16c is turned on, the first special winning opening opening / closing door 16b is in an open state in which it is tilted forward with the lower edge of the first special winning opening 16 as a fulcrum.

  While the first special winning opening opening / closing door 16b is closed, the game balls falling from above the first special winning opening 16 pass in front of the first special winning opening 16 as it is. Therefore, while the first special winning opening opening / closing door 16b is in the closed state, the game ball does not enter the first special winning opening 16. On the other hand, while the first big winning opening opening / closing door 16b is in the open state, most of the game balls falling from above the first big winning opening 16 faced above the first big winning opening opening / closing door 16b. It hits the saucer surface and is guided to the side of the first special winning opening 16. Therefore, while the first special winning opening opening / closing door 16b is in the open state, the game balls can easily enter the first special winning opening 16.

  A second special winning opening 17 is provided at the lower center of the game area 6. The second special winning opening 17 is provided with a second special winning opening detection switch 17a for detecting the entry of a game ball in the second special winning opening 17. When the second special winning opening detection switch 17a detects the entry of a game ball, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out.

  The second special winning opening 17 is provided with a second special winning opening opening / closing door 17b, which is a special electric accessory, and a second special winning opening opening / closing solenoid 17c for switching between opening and closing of the second special winning opening opening / closing door 17b. There is. The second special winning opening opening / closing door 17b has a rectangular plate shape having substantially the same size as the second special winning opening 17. The lower edge of the second special winning opening opening / closing door 17b is pivotably attached to the lower edge of the second special winning opening 17. When the second special winning opening opening / closing solenoid 17c is turned off, the second special winning opening opening / closing door 17b stands up substantially flush with the board surface of the game area 6 to close the second special winning opening 17. When the second special winning opening opening / closing solenoid 17c is turned on, the second special winning opening opening / closing door 17b is in an open state in which it is inclined forward with the lower edge of the second special winning opening 17 as a fulcrum.

  While the second special winning opening opening / closing door 17b is closed, the game balls falling from the diagonally upper right and the diagonally upper left of the second special winning opening 17 pass directly in front of the second special winning opening 17. To do. Therefore, while the second special winning opening opening / closing door 17b is closed, the game ball does not enter the second special winning opening 17. On the other hand, while the second special winning opening opening / closing door 17b is in the open state, most of the game balls falling from above the second special winning opening 17 faced above the second special winning opening opening / closing door 17b. It hits the saucer surface and is guided to the side of the second special winning opening 17. Therefore, while the second special winning opening opening / closing door 17b is in the open state, the game balls can easily enter the second special winning opening 17.

  Above the second special winning opening 17 in the lower center of the game area 6, there are a first starting opening 14 and a second starting opening 15. The first starting port 14 and the second starting port 15 are arranged vertically. The first starting port 14 is provided with a first starting port detection switch 14a that detects passage of a game ball through the first starting port 14. When the first start opening detection switch 14a detects passage of the game ball, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of prize balls are paid out.

  The second starting opening 15 is provided with a second starting opening detection switch 15a for detecting passage of a game ball through the second starting opening 15. When the second starting opening detection switch 15a detects the passage of the game balls, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of prize balls are paid out.

  The second starting port 15 is provided with a pair of movable pieces 15b. The open / closed state of these movable pieces 15b is switched by a starting opening / closing solenoid 15c. When the starting opening / closing solenoid 15c is turned off, the pair of movable pieces 15b are in an upright closed state. When the starting opening / closing solenoid 15c is turned on, the pair of movable pieces 15b are in an open state in which they are inclined in an inverted V shape. The movable piece 15b constitutes an electric tulip (hereinafter appropriately referred to as "den Chu") as an ordinary electric accessory. While the movable piece 15b is in the closed state, most of the game balls falling from the diagonally upper left and right of the second starting opening 15 toward the second starting opening 15 hit the outer surface of the movable piece 15b and bounce off. Therefore, while the movable piece 15b is in the closed state, it becomes difficult for the game ball to pass through the second starting opening 15. On the other hand, while the movable piece 15b is in an open state, most of the game balls falling from the diagonally upper right of the second starting opening 15 toward the second starting opening 15 are guided to the inner surface of the movable piece 15b. The second starting port 15 is reached. Therefore, while the movable piece 15b is in the open state, the game ball easily passes through the second starting opening 15.

  In the right area 6R of the game area 6, a normal symbol gate 13 is provided at a position slightly apart from the first big winning opening 16 upward. The normal symbol gate 13 is provided with a gate detection switch 13a for detecting passage of the game ball in the normal symbol gate 13.

  Here, in the gaming machine 1, the jackpot is triggered by the establishment of the starting condition of the first special symbol due to the start winning of the first starting opening 14 and the establishment of the starting condition of the second special symbol due to the starting winning of the second starting opening 15. If the lottery is executed and the jackpot is won, the corresponding one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is stopped by the symbol according to the type of the jackpot through the variable display for a predetermined period, and this stop symbol indicates A special game is executed according to the type of jackpot. In the special game, the first big winning opening 16 or the second big winning opening 17 until the winning number of the first big winning opening 16 or the second big winning opening 17 reaches a specified number or the opening time reaches a specified time. The opening of is made a round game of one round, and this round game is repeated a plurality of times. There are the following seven types of jackpots for the gaming machine 1.

a1. The first 16R probability variation hit This jackpot is one that can be selected when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery triggered by the establishment of the start condition of the first special symbol is a jackpot. In the special game when the jackpot is won, 16 round games from the first round to the 16th round are performed. In each of the 16 round games, the first big winning opening 16 is opened until the winning number of the first big winning opening 16 reaches a specified number (for example, 9 pieces) or 29 seconds elapses → the first big winning for 2 seconds. The first special winning opening 16 is opened and closed in an opening and closing manner of closing the winning opening 16.

  If you win this jackpot, the gaming state related to the jackpot lottery after the end of the special game, low probability game state (the jackpot lottery winning probability is 2/599) and high probability game state (jackpot lottery winning probability) 20/599), which is a high-probability game state advantageous to the player.

  If the jackpot is won, the game state relating to the ordinary electric accessory (movable piece 15b) after the end of the special game is the electric Chu support state (the movable piece 15b is frequently opened for a long time and the second starting opening). 15 is a state in which it is easy to win a prize) and a non-electricity chew support state (a state in which the movable piece 15b is difficult to be opened), which is an advantageous electric chew support state for the player, and a game state relating to a special symbol. , A time-saving state (a state in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol becomes relatively short) and a non-time-shortening state (a state in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol becomes relatively long), a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player Becomes The state related to the normal electric accessory and the state related to the special symbol are dependent on each other, and when the state related to the normal electric accessory is the electric power support state, the state related to the special symbol is a time reduction state. In the following description, the state related to the ordinary electric accessory is the electric Chu support state and the state related to the special symbol is the time shortened state is called "time saving game state", and the state related to the ordinary electric accessory is not It is called "non-time saving game state" when the state related to special symbols and the state related to the special symbol is the non-time saving state.

  Gaming machine 1, during the non-time saving game state, the winning probability of the ordinary symbol lottery is 1/65536, the variation time of the ordinary symbol is 29 seconds, the second starting port 15 per winning of the ordinary symbol lottery The opening time of the movable piece 15b is 0.2 seconds. Also, during the time saving game state, the winning probability of the ordinary symbol lottery becomes 65535/65536, the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol becomes 3 seconds, and the movable piece 15b of the second starting opening 15 per winning of the ordinary symbol lottery The opening time becomes 3.5 seconds.

b1. 1st 8R probability variation This jackpot is one that can be selected when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery triggered by the establishment of the starting condition of the first special symbol is a jackpot. In the special game when the jackpot is won, eight round games of the first round to the eighth round are performed. In the eight round game, the number of winnings in the second winning hole 17 reaches a specified number (for example, 9) or the second winning hole 17 is opened until 29 seconds elapse → the second winning prize for 2 seconds The second special winning opening 17 is opened and closed in an opening and closing manner of closing the opening 17. When winning this jackpot, the gaming state after the end of the special game becomes the high-probability gaming state and the time saving gaming state.

c1. The first 8R normal hit This jackpot is one that can be selected when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery triggered by the establishment of the starting condition of the first special symbol is a jackpot. In the special game when the jackpot is won, eight round games of the first round to the eighth round are performed. The mode of opening and closing the second special winning opening 17 in eight round games is the same as that of the first 8R probability variation. If the jackpot is won, the gaming state after the end of the special game becomes the low-probability gaming state and the time saving gaming state.

d1. 1st 2R probability variation This this jackpot is one that can be selected when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery triggered by the establishment of the starting condition of the first special symbol is a jackpot. In the special game when the jackpot is won, two round games of the first round and the second round are performed. In the two round game, the second winning hole 17 is opened until the winning number of the second winning hole 17 reaches a prescribed number (for example, 9 pieces) or 0.4 seconds elapses → the second for 2 seconds. The second special winning opening 17 is opened and closed in an opening and closing manner of closing the special winning opening 17. When winning this jackpot, the gaming state after the end of the special game becomes the high-probability gaming state and the time saving gaming state.

f1. The second 16R probability variation hit This jackpot is one that can be selected when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery triggered by the establishment of the start condition of the second special symbol is a jackpot. In the special game when the jackpot is won, 16 round games from the first round to the 16th round are performed. The mode of opening and closing the first special winning opening 16 in the 16 round game is the same as that of the first 16R probability variation. When winning this jackpot, the gaming state after the end of the special game becomes the high-probability gaming state and the time saving gaming state.

g1. The second 8R probability variation hit This jackpot is one that can be selected when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery triggered by the establishment of the starting condition of the second special symbol is a jackpot. In the special game when the jackpot is won, eight round games of the first round to the eighth round are performed. The mode of opening and closing the second special winning opening 17 in eight round games is the same as that of the first 8R probability variation. When winning this jackpot, the gaming state after the end of the special game becomes the high-probability gaming state and the time saving gaming state.

i1. 2nd 8R normal hit This jackpot is one that can be selected when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery triggered by the establishment of the starting condition of the second special symbol is a jackpot. In the special game when the jackpot is won, eight round games of the first round to the eighth round are performed. The mode of opening and closing the second special winning opening 17 in eight round games is the same as that of the first 8R probability variation. If the jackpot is won, the gaming state after the end of the special game becomes the low-probability gaming state and the time saving gaming state.

  In the following description, the first 16R probability change hit, the first 8R probability change hit, the first 2R probability change hit, the second 16R probability change hit, and the second 8R probability change hit are collectively referred to as “probability change hit” as appropriate. .. In addition, the first 8R normal hit and the second 8R normal hit are collectively referred to as “normal hit” as appropriate. Also, the first 16R probability variation hit and the second 16R probability variation hit are collectively referred to as “16R hit” as appropriate. The first 8R probability variation, the first 8R normal variation, the second 8R probability variation, and the second 8R normal variation are collectively referred to as “8R”. The first 2R probability change hit is appropriately called “2R hit”.

  Further, in the gaming machine 1, a normal symbol lottery for determining whether or not the normal symbol hits is executed upon the establishment of the starting condition of the ordinary symbol due to the passage of the game ball of the normal symbol gate 13, and a winning is won in this ordinary symbol lottery. In this case, the movable piece 15b, which is an ordinary electric accessory, is kept open for a predetermined period. While the movable piece 15b is in the open state, the game ball easily passes through the second starting port 15, so that the starting condition of the second special symbol is easily established.

  An out port 11 is provided at the center of the bottom of the game area 6. A game ball that reaches the bottom of the game area 6 without entering any of the general winning opening 12, the first starting opening 14, the second starting opening 15, the first big winning opening 16, and the second big winning opening 17. Are discharged through the outlet 11.

  An image display device 31 is fitted between the decoration member 7 and the first starting opening 14 in the game area 6. The image display device 31, under the control of the image control board 150, produces a game by displaying an image.

  Explaining in more detail, the gaming machine 1 performs the symbol variation effect in accordance with the symbol variation from the start to the stop of the variation of the special symbol. As shown in FIG. 6A, in the symbol variation effect, the image display device 31 has a left symbol 36L, a middle symbol 36C, a right symbol 36R, and a fourth symbol 36Z (hereinafter, these symbols 36L, 36C, 36R). , 36Z is appropriately referred to as "effect symbol 36"). The left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, the right symbol 36R, and the fourth symbol 36Z are changed in synchronization with the first special symbol display device 20 and the second special symbol display device 21, so that the first special symbol display device 20 and the second symbol The same jackpot determination result as the special symbol of the special symbol display device 21 is notified.

  The symbols displayed as the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R include "1" symbol, "2" symbol, "3" symbol, "4" symbol, "5" symbol, "6" symbol, " There are "7" symbol, "8" symbol, and "9" symbol. Further, the display mode of the fourth symbol 36Z includes a first display mode, a second display mode, and a third display mode.

  As shown in FIG. 6A, when the variable display of the special symbol triggered by the start winning of the first starting opening 14 or the second starting opening 15 is started, the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R are displayed. Each is "1" symbol → "2" symbol → "3" symbol → "4" symbol → "5" symbol → "6" symbol → "7" symbol → "8" symbol → "9" symbol → "1" The one cycle display of the symbol is started, and the fourth symbol 36Z starts the one cycle display of the first display mode → the second display mode → the third display mode → the first display mode. When the special symbol stops after changing display over a predetermined fluctuation time T, the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, the right symbol 36R, and the fourth symbol 36Z are stopped in a combination corresponding to the stopped special symbol. If the combination of the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, the right symbol 36R, and the fourth symbol 36Z that are stopped and displayed is a big hit, a special game is executed. The type of jackpot notified by the combination of the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, the right symbol 36R, and the fourth symbol 36Z in the symbol variation effect, and the type of jackpot notified by the special symbol always match.

  FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a relationship between a type of jackpot and a combination of the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, the right symbol 36R, and the fourth symbol 36Z. In the gaming machine 1, when 16R probability variation is won in the jackpot lottery, the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R are either "333" or "777", and the fourth symbol 36Z is the third display mode, Stop with the combination.

  When the 8R probability variation is won in the jackpot lottery, the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R are "111", "222", "444", "555", "666", "888", "999". The fourth symbol 36Z is stopped in the combination of the second display mode. When winning 8R in the jackpot lottery, the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R are "111", "222", "444", "555", "666", "888", "999". The fourth symbol 36Z is stopped in the combination of the first display mode.

  When the 2R probability variation is won in the jackpot lottery, the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R are "135" and the fourth symbol 36Z is the first display mode, and the combination is stopped. If the result of the jackpot lottery is a loss, the combination is stopped in any combination other than the above.

  Here, the fourth symbol 36Z has an extremely small display size as compared with the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R. Therefore, when the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R are stopped by the same symbol combination other than "777" and "333", it is not clear which of the 8R certainty variation and the 8R normal winning is won. It has become. When the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R are stopped by the symbol combination of "777" or "333", it is easily understood that the 16R probability variation is won at the stop time.

  As shown in FIG. 6 (a), when the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, the right symbol 36R, and the fourth symbol 36Z are stopped in a jackpot combination and a special game is performed, a special game effect is created in accordance with the special game. I do. In the special game effect, the image display device 31 displays an image for guiding right-handing, an image indicating the number of rounds of the round game, and the like.

As shown in FIG. 6B, an image 37 (0) _{0 of the} fluctuation is displayed in the lower center part of the image display device 31. If the first is pending variation of the special symbols, on the left side of the image of the variation in the image display device 31 37 (0), the image 37 of the _first hold the first special symbol (variation order is first hold) (1), second hold image ₃₇ 1 (2) of the (variation order is second hold), the third hold image ₃₇ 1 (3) of the (variation order is third hold), and a fourth hold (variation Up to four images of the image 37 ₁ (4) of the fourth order) are displayed.

In addition, when there is a change pending of the second special symbol, on the right side of the image 37 (0) of the change in the image display device 31, an image of the first pending in the second special symbol (the change order is the first pending) 37 ₂ (1), second hold image ₃₇ 2 (2) of the (variation order is second hold), the third hold image ₃₇ 2 (3) of the (variation order is third hold), and a fourth hold A maximum of 4 images of the image 37 ₂ (4) of (4th hold in variation order) are displayed. Here, in FIG. 6B, for simplicity, only the images 37 (0), 37 ₁ (1), 37 ₁ (2), and 37 ₁ (3) are shown.

When the hold display number of the first special symbol hold display 23 increases, an image 37 ₁ (1), 37 ₁ (2), 37 ₁ (3), or 37 ₁ (4) corresponding to the increased hold number Appear. When the hold display number of the second special symbol hold display 24 increases, an image 37 ₂ (1), 37 ₂ (2), 37 ₂ (3), or 37 ₂ (4) corresponding to the increased hold number is displayed. Appear.

During the display of the image 37 ₁ (1), 37 ₁ (2), 37 ₁ (3), or 37 ₁ (4) corresponding to the number of reserved displays of the first special symbol reserved display 23, one time of the special symbol The image 37 (0) of the change disappears every time the change of No. ends, the first hold image 37 ₁ (1) moves to the position of the change image 37 (0) of the change, and the images after the second hold 37 ₁ (2), 37 ₁ (3), or 37 ₁ (4) moves to the position adjacent to the right of each.

During the display of the image 37 ₂ (1), 37 ₂ (2), 37 ₂ (3), or 37 ₂ (4) corresponding to the number of reserved displays of the second special symbol reserved display 24, one time of the special symbol The image 37 (0) of the change disappears every time the change of No. is finished, the first hold image 37 ₂ (1) moves to the position of the change image 37 (0) of the change, and the images after the second hold 37 ₂ (2), 37 ₂ (3), or 37 ₂ (4) moves to the position adjacent to the left of each.

In the following description, the images 37 (0), 37 ₁ (1), 37 ₁ (2), 37 ₁ (3), 37 ₁ (4), 37 ₂ (1), 37 ₂ (2), 37 ₂ ( 3) and 37 ₂ (4) are appropriately referred to as “holding display image 37”.

  In the design variation effect, the gaming machine 1 is a normal reach effect, a SP reach effect, a SPSP reach effect, a full rotation reach effect, a re-lottery effect, and a first role, based on the lottery result of the jackpot lottery and the operation of the effect button 35. One of a plurality of types of effects including an object operation effect, a second accessory operation effect, a pseudo effect effect, a step-up effect, a dialogue operation effect, a roulette operation effect, a gauge operation effect, a timing operation effect, and a specific notice effect. A plurality of effects are selected, and the image display device 31, the sound output device 32, the effect drive devices 33a and 33b, and the effect illumination device 34 are caused to execute the selected effect or effects. Further, in the special game effect, the gaming machine 1 selects and selects one or a plurality of effects from among a plurality of types of effects including promotion effects, based on the lottery result of the jackpot drawing and the operation of the effect button 35. Alternatively, the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, the drive devices 33a and 33b for effect, and the effect illumination device 34 are caused to execute a plurality of effects. The outline of each effect executed as a symbol variation effect or a special game effect is as follows.

As shown in FIG. 8A, a normal reach effect may be executed as a part of the symbol variation effect. The normal reach effect may be executed at a predetermined time t _NR within the variation time T of the special symbol. In the normal reach effect, the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R are in a reach state in which the left symbol 36L and the right symbol 36R are temporarily stopped while the middle symbol 36C changes.

As shown in FIG. 8B, the SP reach effect may be executed as a part of the symbol variation effect. The SP reach effect may be executed at the time t _SP of the final stage (after the reach is established) of the symbol variation accompanying the establishment of the reach (hereinafter, appropriately referred to as “reach variation”). In the symbol variation that does not involve the establishment of the reach (hereinafter, appropriately referred to as “normal variation”), the SP reach effect is not executed. The SP reach production is a development production that develops from the normal reach production. In the SP reach effect, the left symbol 36L and the right symbol 36R are separated from each other in the left and right corners of the screen, and an animation character image of a plurality of characters is displayed in the center of the screen. The reliability of the jackpot when the SP reach production is developed is higher than when the SP reach production is not developed.

As shown in FIG. 8C, the SPSP reach effect may be executed as a part of the symbol variation effect. The SPSP reach effect may be executed at time t _SPSP at the end of the reach variation (after the reach is established). In normal fluctuation, the SPSP reach effect is not executed. The SPSP reach production is a development production that develops from the normal reach production. In the SPSP reach production, the left symbol 36L and the right symbol 36R are separated from each other in the left and right corners of the screen, and a recorded image of a song by a plurality of characters is displayed in the center of the screen. The reliability of the jackpot when the SPSP reach production is developed is higher than when the SPSP reach production is not developed.

As shown in FIG. 8D, the all-reach reach effect may be executed as a part of the symbol variation effect. The all-rotation reach effect is an effect in which the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R fluctuate while being aligned with a combination of symbols of the same type. The all-rotation reach effect may be executed at time t _ZKT at the end of the normal fluctuation or the reach fluctuation (after the reach is established). The full rotation reach effect may be executed in the normal fluctuation and the reach fluctuation, or may be executed only in the reach fluctuation. The all-rotation reach effect is one of the jackpot confirmed effects (an effect that notifies the effect before the effect pattern 36 stops in the combination of the jackpots).

As shown in FIG. 9A and FIG. 9B, the re-lottery effect may be executed as a part of the symbol variation effect. The re-lottery effect may be executed at the time t _SCHU at the end of the reach variation (after the reach is established). In the normal fluctuation, the re-lottery effect is not executed. In the re-lottery effect, the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R are temporarily stopped in a combination that is not a unique combination (either "333" or "777") for the 16R probability variation (display that is slightly shaking). Stop in a mode). After that, the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R change again for a short time, and temporarily stop again with the same or different symbol combination as before the temporary stop, when the temporary stop of the special symbol. Keep up.

  As shown in FIG. 9A, when the 16R probability variation is won, the symbol combination at the time of temporary stop before the re-variation is “111”, “222”, “444”, “555”, “666”. , “888”, and “999” (“222” in the example of FIG. 9A), and the symbol combination at the time of temporary stop after re-change is either “333” or “777”. ("777" in the example of FIG. 9A). The effect that the symbol combination at the time of temporary stop after this re-changing is either "333" or "777" is the 16R sure change per fixed confirmation effect (before the stop of the effect pattern 36 with the unique combination per 16R sure change). Is one of the effects).

  As shown in FIG. 9B, when the big hit other than the 16R probability change hit is won, the symbol combination at the time of temporary stop before and after the re-change is “111”, “222”, “444”, “555”. , “666”, “888”, and “999” (“222” in the example of FIG. 9B).

As shown in FIGS. 10A and 10B, the first accessory operation effect may be executed as a part of the symbol variation effect. The first accessory effect operation effect is an effect in which the first movable accessory 330a is dropped when the operation button 35 is operated. The first accessory operation effect may be executed during the period from time t _{AY0 to} t _{AY2 in} the _final stage of the reach variation (after the reach is established). In the first accessory operation effect, the notification condition is that the pressing operation of pressing the effect button 35 is performed within the operation reception valid period of the effect button 35, and if the pressing operation is performed within the operation reception effective period, The 1 movable accessory 330a is dropped, thereby notifying the jackpot determination result.

More specifically, in the first _accessory operation effect, at time t _AY0 , an image imitating the effect button 35 and an indicator image showing the progress of the operation acceptance valid period of the effect button 35 appear, and at time t _AY1 . A guide image (character image of “press!”) Prompting the user to operate the effect button 35 appears. In the first _accessory operation production, the period from time t _AY1 to time t _AY2 is the operation reception valid period, and the time marker (indicated by hatching in the figure in the figure) in the indicator image according to the passage of this period. The right end) goes to the right. If the pressing operation is performed within the operation reception valid period, the operation result is notified immediately after the pressing operation. When the end time t _AY2 of the operation reception valid period is reached without the pressing operation being _performed , the operation result is _{notified at} the end time t _AY2 . The manner of notifying the operation result includes that the accessory is dropped and that the accessory is not dropped.

  As shown in FIG. 10A, in the effect with drop of the accessory, the first movable accessory 330a descends immediately after the pressing operation. The effect in which the first movable auditors object 330a descends is one of the jackpot confirmation effects (an effect that informs that before the effect pattern 36 stops in the combination of the jackpots). In the variable display of the special symbol, if the first movable accessory 330a descends, then the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R are stopped and displayed in a jackpot symbol combination.

  As shown in FIG. 10B, in the effect without dropping the accessory, the first movable accessory 330a does not descend regardless of whether or not the pressing operation is performed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10C, the first _accessory operation specific notice effect may be executed at time _t'AY1 before the operation of the effect button 35 in the first _accessory operation effect. The first accessory operation specific advance notice effect is an effect that suggests a mode of progress of the effect after the operation button 35 is operated. In the first accessory operation specific notice production, a movable accessory dejav image showing the first movable accessory 330a in a semi-transparent state appears.

As shown in FIGS. 11A and 11B, the second accessory operation effect may be executed as a part of the symbol variation effect. The second accessory effect operation effect is an effect of tilting the second movable accessory 330b triggered by the operation of the effect button 35. The second accessory operation effect may be executed during the period from time t _{SY0 to} t _{SY2 in} the final stage of the reach variation (after the reach is established). In the second accessory operation effect, the notification condition is that the pressing operation of pressing the effect button 35 is performed within the operation reception valid period of the effect button 35, and when the pressing operation is performed within the operation reception effective period, 2) The movable accessory 330b is tilted to notify the SP reach effect or the development to the SPSP reach effect.

More specifically, in the second _accessory operation effect, at time t _SY0 , an image imitating the effect button 35 and an indicator image showing the progress status of the operation acceptance valid period of the effect button 35 appear, and at time t _SY1 . A guide image (character image of “press!”) Prompting the user to operate the effect button 35 appears. In the second _accessory operation production, the period from the end time t _SY1 to the time t _SY2 is set as the operation reception valid period, and the time marker in the indicator image (in the hatched area of the figure The right end) goes to the right. If the pressing operation is performed within the operation reception valid period, the operation result is notified immediately after the pressing operation. When the end time t _SY2 of the operation reception valid period is reached without the pressing operation being performed, the operation result is _{notified at} the end time t _SY2 . The manner of notifying the operation result includes the tilt of the accessory and the absence of tilt of the accessory.

  As shown in FIG. 11A, in the effect with tilt of the accessory, the second movable accessory 330b tilts immediately after the pressing operation. The effect in which the second movable auditors object 330b tilts is a development notification effect (an effect that notifies the SP reach effect or the SPSP reach effect before the SP reach effect or the SPSP reach effect). In the variable display of the special symbol, if the second movable accessory 330b is tilted, then the SP reach effect or the SPSP reach effect is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 11B, in the effect without tilting the accessory, the second movable accessory 330b does not tilt regardless of whether or not the pressing operation is performed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11C, the second _accessory operation specific notice effect may be executed at time t ′ _SY1 before the operation of the effect button 35 in the second _accessory operation effect. The second accessory operation specific advance notice effect is an effect that suggests a mode of progress of the effect after the operation button 35 is operated. In the second accessory operation specific notice presentation, a movable accessory dejav image showing the second movable accessory 330b in a semi-transparent state appears.

As shown in FIGS. 12 (a), 12 (b), and 12 (c), there is a case where a pseudo continuous effect is executed as a part of the symbol variation effect. The pseudo continuous effect is an effect in which the pseudo fluctuation including the temporary stop in the pseudo continuous chance pattern of the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R and the subsequent re-variation display is repeated up to three times. The pseudo consecutive chances are “112”, “445”, “556”, “889”, and “991”. The first pseudo variation in the pseudo continuous production may be executed at the time t _GJ1 which is the beginning of the normal variation or the reach variation (before the reach is established). Pseudo variation the second time at time _{t GJ2} after time _{t GJ1,} pseudo variation of the third time at time _{t GJ3} after time _{t GJ2,} may be performed, respectively. The reliability of the jackpot in the pseudo continuous production increases as the number of times of pseudo fluctuations increases. The third pseudo-variation in the pseudo-reproduction in which the pseudo-variation is three times is one of the big-hit finalized productions (production that informs that before the production design 36 stops in the combination of the big hits). In the variation display of the special symbol, when the number of pseudo variations reaches three times, finally, the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R are stopped and displayed in a jackpot symbol combination.

As shown in FIGS. 13A and 13B, a step-up effect may be executed as part of the symbol variation effect. The step-up effect is a step effect from a step specified as the final step to each step within the normal steps with an upper limit of 4 steps and a special step that can proceed after the upper limit of the normal step is reached only when the jackpot is confirmed. Is a production that develops. The step production of the normal stage 1 in the step-up production may be executed at the time t _{SUP1 from} the beginning to the middle of the normal variation or the reach variation (before the reach is established). The normal stage 2 step effect is at time t _SUP2 after time t _SUP1 , the normal stage 3 step effect is at time t _SUP3 after time t _SUP2 , and the normal stage 4 step effect is at time t _SUP3 . at time _{t SUP4} later than _SUP3, step rendition of special stage at time _{t SUPS} after time _{t SUP4,} it may be performed, respectively.

  In the step production of each of the normal stage 1 to the special stage of the step-up production, a photo image of the girl unique to each stage is superimposed on the photo image of the previous stage. The frame color of the photo image that appears in the step effect of each step of the step-up effect includes three colors, blue, green, and red. There is a development branch point between successive stages in the step-up effect, and the frame color of the photo image is divided into a plurality of development destinations at the development branch point.

  FIG. 14 is a diagram showing the relationship between the photo image and the frame color at each stage in the step-up effect, and the jackpot reliability. As shown in FIG. 14, in the step-up effect, the higher the stage, the higher the reliability of the jackpot. In the case of a photo image at the same stage, the green frame has a higher jackpot reliability than the blue frame, and the red frame has a higher jackpot reliability than the green frame. In the step production in the special stage, the background color in the frame in the photo image in the normal stage 4 becomes gold. The step effect of this special stage is one of the jackpot finalized effects (the effect that notifies the effect before the effect pattern 36 stops in the combination of the jackpots). In the variable display of the special symbol, when the special stage of the step-up effect is advanced, finally, the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R are stopped and displayed in a jackpot symbol combination.

As shown in FIG. 15A, a dialogue operation effect may be executed as a part of the symbol variation effect. The serif operation effect is an effect in which the serif effect is advanced according to the operation of the effect button 35. The dialogue operation effect may be executed during the period from time t _{SR0 to} t _SR2 in the beginning of normal fluctuation or reach fluctuation (before the reach is established). In the dialogue operation production, the notification condition is that the pressing operation of pressing the production button 35 is performed within the operation reception valid period of the production button 35, and the operation result is notified when the pressing operation is performed within the operation reception valid period. To do.

More specifically, in the dialogue operation effect, at time t _SR0 , a balloon frame and a round display of the silhouette of the character A → the silhouette of the character B → the silhouette of the character C → the silhouette of the character D → the silhouette of the character A are repeated. A silhouette image appears. At time t _SR1 , an image imitating the effect button 35, an indicator image showing the progress of the operation acceptance valid period of the effect button 35, and a guide image (character image of “press!”) Prompting the operation of the effect button 35 appear. To do. In the dialogue operation effect, the period from the time t _SR1 to the time t _SR2 is set as the operation reception valid period, and the time marker (the right end of the hatched area in the figure) in the indicator image is set according to the passage of this period. Go to the right. If the pressing operation is performed within the operation reception valid period, the operation result is notified immediately after the pressing operation. The manner of notifying the operation result includes that the character A appears as a dialogue speaker, that the character B appears as a dialogue speaker, that the character C appears as a dialogue speaker, and that the character D appears as a dialogue speaker. is there. If the pressing operation is not performed within the operation reception valid period, the dialogue operation effect ends without proceeding to the notification of the operation result.

  As shown in FIG. 15A, in the effect in which the character A becomes a dialogue speaker, when the pressing operation is performed, the loop display of the silhouette image is stopped, the image of the character A appears, and the character A is displayed in the balloon frame. Is displayed. In the production in which the character B becomes the speaker, when the pressing operation is performed, the loop display of the silhouette image is stopped, the image of the character B appears, and the dialog of the character B is displayed in the balloon frame. In the production in which the character C becomes the dialogue speaker, when the pressing operation is performed, the loop display of the silhouette image is stopped, the image of the character C appears, and the dialogue of the character C is displayed in the balloon frame. In the production in which the character D becomes the speaker, when the pressing operation is performed, the one-round display of the silhouette image is stopped, the image of the character D appears, and the dialog of the character D is displayed in the balloon frame. Although the jackpot reliability of the dialogue operation effect in which the character D is the speech speaker among the characters A, B, C, and D is higher than that in the dialogue operation effect in which the characters A, B, and C are the speech speakers, the reliability of both is high. There is no big difference between the degrees. The dialogue operation effect in which the characters A, B, C, and D are the dialogue speakers is an effect called a lively effect that is so low that the influence on the reliability of the jackpot can be ignored (cass effect).

  However, as shown in FIG. 15B, when the jackpot is won by the jackpot lottery, the image of the premium character may appear with a very low probability when the one-cycle display of the silhouette image is stopped. The effect in which the image of the premium character appears is one of the jackpot confirming effects (the effect of notifying the effect before the effect design 36 stops in the combination of the jackpots). In the variable display of the special symbol, when the image of the premium character appears after the round-trip display of the silhouette images of the characters A, B, C, and D, the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R are finally obtained. Stop display with a combination of jackpots.

Further, as shown in FIG. 15C, the dialogue operation specific notice presentation is executed at time t ′ _SRF before the operation of the presentation button 35 in the dialogue operation presentation in which the image of the premium character is to appear. There are cases. The dialogue operation specific notice presentation is an indication that suggests a mode of development of the presentation after the operation of the operation button 35 in the dialogue operation presentation. In the dialogue operation specific notice presentation, a premium character dejavu image in which the premium character is shown semitransparently appears in the balloon frame during the round-trip display of the silhouette image.

As shown in FIG. 16A, a roulette operation effect may be executed as a part of the symbol variation effect. The roulette operation effect is an effect in which the roulette effect is advanced according to the operation of the effect button 35. The roulette operation effect may be executed during the period from time t _{RL0 to} t _RL2 at the beginning of normal fluctuation or reach fluctuation (before the reach is established). In the roulette operation effect, the notification condition is that the pressing operation of pressing the effect button 35 is performed within the operation reception valid period of the effect button 35, and the operation result is notified when the pressing operation is performed within the operation reception effective period. To do.

More specifically, in the roulette operation effect, at time t _RL0 , at time t _RL1 , a roulette image that repeats a cycle of “!” → “Change” → “NEXT” → “SP” → “!” Appears, and at time t _RL1 . , An image imitating the effect button 35, an indicator image showing the progress of the operation reception valid period of the effect button 35, and a guide image (character image of “press!”) Prompting the operation of the effect button 35 appear. In the roulette operation effect, the period from the time t _RL1 to the time t _RL2 is set as the operation reception valid period, and the time marker (the right end of the hatched area in the figure) in the indicator image is adjusted according to the lapse of this period. Go to the right. When the pressing operation is performed within the operation reception valid period, the operation result is notified after waiting for the operation reception valid period to elapse. There are modes for notifying the operation result of the roulette result of "!", "Change", "NEXT", and "SP". If the pressing operation is not performed within the operation reception valid period, the roulette operation effect ends without proceeding to the notification of the operation result.

  Here, "!" Indicates that the possibility of being a big hit is low. “Chance” indicates that the normal reach effect may be executed in the variable display. "NEXT" indicates that there is a possibility that the pseudo continuous effect may be executed in the variable display. “SP” indicates that the SP reach effect may be executed in the variable display.

  As shown in FIG. 16A, in the effect in which the outcome of the roulette is "!", When the pressing operation is performed, the roulette image stops at "!". In the effect in which the roulette roll is "Chance", when the pressing operation is performed, the roulette image is stopped at "Chance". In the effect in which the roulette result is "NEXT", when the pressing operation is performed, the roulette image stops at "NEXT". In the effect in which the roulette roll is "SP", when the pressing operation is performed, the roulette image is stopped at "SP". Among the "!", "Chance", "NEXT", and "SP", the reliability of the jackpot of the roulette operation where the roulette roll is "!" Is "Chance", "NEXT" for the roulette roll, Although it is higher than the reliability of the jackpot in the roulette operation effect of “SP” and “SP”, there is no big difference between the two. The roulette operation effect where "!", "Chance", "NEXT", and "SP" are the outcomes of the roulette is called lively, and the effect on the reliability of the jackpot is so low that it can be ignored (casing effect). ). However, as shown in FIG. 16B, when the jackpot is won by the jackpot lottery, the image of the premium character may appear with a very low probability when the one-round display of the roulette image is stopped. The effect in which the image of the premium character appears is one of the jackpot confirming effects (the effect of notifying the effect before the effect design 36 stops in the combination of the jackpots). When the image of the premium character appears after the round display of the roulette image in the variable display of the special symbol, finally, the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R are stopped and displayed in a jackpot symbol combination.

Further, as shown in FIG. 16C, the roulette operation specific advance notice effect is executed at time t ′ _RL1 before the operation of the effect button 35 in the roulette operation effect in which the image of the premium character is to appear. There are cases. The roulette operation specific notice effect is an effect that suggests a mode of development of the effect after the operation of the operation button 35 in the roulette operation effect. In the roulette operation specific notice presentation, a premium character dejavu image in which the premium character is shown semitransparently appears on the right of the roulette image being displayed once.

As shown in FIGS. 17 (a), 17 (b), and 17 (c), a gauge operation effect may be executed as a part of the symbol variation effect. The gauge operation effect is an effect that progresses a stage effect (an effect that increases the number of points that indicate the reliability of the jackpot) according to the operation of the operation button 35. The gauge operation effect may be executed during the period from time t _{GG0 to} t _GG5 in the middle of the normal fluctuation or the reach fluctuation (after the reach is established). In the gauge operation effect, the notification condition is that the pressing operation of pressing the effect button 35 is performed within the operation reception valid period of the effect button 35, and when the pressing operation is performed within the operation reception effective period, the operation reception effective period The operation result is notified after a lapse of time.

More specifically, in the gauge operation effect, at time t _GG0 , a gauge image simulating a torch appears on the left side of the screen. In the gauge image, the lower end of the progress range in the gauge image is 0 point, the upper end of the progress range in the gauge image is 10000 point, and the acquisition point up to any stage between 0 and 10000 (in the hatched portion of the figure, Depending on whether the (upper side) rises, it shows the degree of expectation of development to SP reach production and SPSP reach production. There is a scale of "0" at the lower left of the progress area of the gauge image. There is a scale of "10000" at the upper left of the progress area of the gauge image. In the gauge operation presentation, the period from time t _GG0 to time t _GG3 is the first half of the progress period, and the gauge progress amount increases.

In the gauge operation effect, at time t _GG3 , the increase in the gauge development amount temporarily stops, and an image simulating the effect button 35, an indicator image showing the progress of the operation acceptance valid period of the effect button 35, and the operation of the effect button 35 are displayed. A prompting image (character image of "Press!") Appears. In the gauge operation effect, the period from time t _GG3 to time t _GG4 is set as the operation reception valid period, and the time marker (the right end of the hatched area in the figure) in the indicator image is set to the right according to the passage of this period. Proceed to. When the player presses the effect button 35 within the operation acceptance valid period or when the operation acceptance valid period end time t _GG4 is _reached , the gauge progresses again. In the gauge operation presentation, the period from the restart of the progress of the gauge to the time t _GG5 is the latter half of the progress period, and the gauge progress amount increases. At time t _GG5 , the gauge stops progressing and the final score is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 17 (a), the production with the final score of 10,000 or more (10025 in the example of FIG. 17 (a)) is developed to SPSP production (SPSP reach production before it develops to SPSP reach production). It is an effect for informing that it is done). When the final score of the gauge operation effect reaches 10,000 or more, the SPSP reach effect is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 17 (b), the production of which the final score is 8000 or more (8275 in the example of FIG. 17 (a)) is the development notification production (SP reach production or SPSP reach production before the SP development. It is an effect for notifying that the reach effect or SPSP reach effect will be developed. When the final score of the gauge operation effect reaches 8000 or more, the SP reach effect or the SPSP reach effect is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 17 (c), the final score is 3333 or 7777, and the 16R probability variation hit confirmation effect (the effect design 36 informs that before the stop in a unique combination of 16R probability variation hits. ) Is one of. When the final score of the gauge operation effect is 3333 or 7777, the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R are stopped and displayed with a symbol combination of 16R probability variation.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 17 (d), at the time t ′ _GG3 before the operation of the effect button 35 in the gauge operation effect which is supposed to progress to the point acquisition stage of 8000 or more, the gauge operation specific notice effect is _displayed. It may be executed. The gauge operation specific notice effect is an effect that suggests a mode of progress of the effect after the operation of the operation button 35 in the gauge operation effect. In the gauge operation specific notice presentation, a dejav image showing the final acquisition point (10075 in the example of FIG. 17B) in a semi-transparent state appears on the right side of the gauge during the progress of the gauge.

As shown in FIGS. 18 (a) and 18 (b), a timing operation effect may be executed as a part of the symbol variation effect. The timing operation effect is an effect of notifying the presence or absence of development to a development effect (SP reach effect or SPSP reach effect) when the timing operation of the effect button 35 is successful. The timing operation effect may be executed during the period from time t _{TM0 to} t _TM5 in the middle of the normal fluctuation or the reach fluctuation (after the reach is established). In the timing operation effect, the notification condition is that a guidance image prompting the operation of the effect button 35 is displayed, the operation of the operation button 35 is accepted, and the pressing operation of pressing the operation button 35 at a predetermined timing is performed. When the pressing operation is performed at a predetermined timing, the operation result is notified.

More specifically, in the timing operation effect, at time t _TM0 , an image simulating the effect button 35 and a guide image prompting the operation of the effect button 35 are displayed at the lower center of the screen. Image) appears. At time t _TM1 , a line extends from the image of the effect button 35 in the lower center toward the upper left, and the first duplicated image of the effect button 35 appears ahead of that. At time t _TM2 , the line extends from the first duplicated image to the upper right, and the second duplicated image appears at the tip of the line. At time t _TM3 , the line extends to the left from the second duplicate image, and the third duplicate image appears at the tip of the line. At time t _TM4 , a line extends from the third duplicated image to the lower right, and the fourth duplicated image appears at the tip of the line. At time t _TM5 , a line extends from the fourth duplicate image toward the image of the effect button 35 in the center of the screen, and a pentagon having the images of the five effect buttons 35 as vertices is completed.

After the guide image disappears, the player has the appearance timing t _TM1 of the first image of the effect button 35, the appearance timing t _{TM2 of} the second image, the appearance timing t _TM3 of the third image, and 4. The production button 35 is pressed in accordance with the appearance timing t _TM4 of the second image. If the operation timing of the effect button 35 matches any one of the appearance timings t _TM1 , t _TM2 , t _TM3 , and t _TM4 of the images of the first to fourth effect buttons 35, the single operation is successful. When the single operation succeeds, the character image of “GOOD” appears as an effect in the effect mode corresponding to the matching of the operation timing and the appearance timing. If the operation timing of the effect button 35 does not match any of the appearance timings t _TM1 , t _TM2 , t _TM3 , and t _TM4 of the image of the effect button 35, the single operation fails. If the single operation fails, the character image of "Miss" appears as the effect in the effect mode in which the operation timing and the appearance timing do not match. When the operation timings of pressing the production button 35 multiple times match all the appearance timings t _TM1 , t _TM2 , t _TM3 , and t _TM4 of the images of the first to fourth production buttons 35, the operation is completed, and the plurality of operations are completed. A character image of "EXCELLENT" appears as an effect in an effect mode corresponding to that the operation timing of the single operation matches all the appearance timings.

  As shown in FIG. 18A, when the character image of “EXCELLENT” appears, the character image of “SP” may appear after the pentagon is completed. The effect in which the character image of "SP" appears is a development notification effect (an effect of notifying to the SP reach effect or the SPSP reach effect before the SP reach effect or the SPSP reach effect). When the character image of "SP" appears in the variable display of the special symbol, the SP reach effect or the SPSP reach effect is then executed.

  As shown in FIG. 19A, FIG. 20A, and FIG. 20B, a back button timing operation effect (hereinafter, referred to as “back button operation effect”) is executed as a part of the symbol variation effect. There are cases where The back button operation effect is an effect of notifying whether or not a big hit is won when the operation of the back button of the effect button 35 is successful.

The back button operation effect includes a reach back button operation effect and a step-up back button operation effect. The reach back button operation effect (FIG. 19 (a)) may be executed in the period before and after the reach establishment time t _NR within the reach variation in which the special symbol is supposed to stop at the symbol indicating a big hit. Is. The step-up back button operation effect may be executed in the normal variation within the special variation or reach variation in which the special symbol is to be stopped at the symbol indicating the big hit after the step-up effect of the ordinary stage 4. from 2 of time _{t SU2} is a period of up to time _{t SU4} of normal stage 4.

In the reach back button operation effect, operation of the operation button 35 is accepted without displaying a guide image prompting the operation of the effect button 35, and the operation button 35 is informed that a pressing operation is performed at the reach timing t _NR. As a condition, when the pressing operation is performed in accordance with the reach establishment timing t _NR , the operation result is notified. More specifically, in the reach back button operation effect, if the operation timing of the effect button 35 matches the reach timing t _NR , the back button operation is successful. When the back button operation succeeds, the back button operation success notification voice (“transcendence cute”) is output from the voice output device 32 as an effect of an effect mode according to that the operation timing of the operation button 35 matches the reach timing t _NR. Sound) is output. The effect in which the back button operation success sound is output is one of the jackpot confirmation effects (an effect that informs that before the effect design 36 stops in the combination of the jackpots). When the back button operation success voice is output in the variable display of the special symbol, the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R are finally stopped and displayed in a jackpot symbol combination.

In the step-up back button operation effect, the operation on the operation button 35 is accepted without displaying the guide image for prompting the operation on the effect button 35, and the operation button 35 is pressed at four back button operation determination timings t _UR1 in the step-up effect. , triggered _{by t UR2, t UR3, t UR4} the notification condition that the repeated pressing operation is performed to match the, back button operation determination timing _{t UR1, t UR2, t UR3} , battered operation tailored to _{t UR4} is performed As a result, the operation result is notified. In more detail, the step-up back button operation effect, if someone operation timings of a plurality of times of operation of the performance button 35 and all the determination timing _{t UR1, t UR2, t UR3} , t UR4, successful back button operation Becomes Successful back button operation, the operation timing determination timing _t UR1 of the operation button _35, t _UR2, t _UR3, as effect of the representation embodiment according to fit with all _{t UR4,} back button operation on the performance symbols 36 A success image (character image of "Congratulations") is displayed. The effect in which the back button operation success image is displayed is one of the jackpot confirmation effects (an effect that notifies that before the effect design 36 stops in the combination of the jackpots). When the back button operation success image is displayed in the variable display of the special symbol, the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R are finally stopped and displayed in a jackpot symbol combination.

As shown in FIG. 21A and FIG. 21B, the promotion effect may be executed as a part of the special game effect during the special game. The promotion effect, the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R are "111", "222", "444", "555", "666", "888", or "999". In the special game that is performed by doing that, at the beginning of the execution of the special game, without clearly indicating whether 8R probability variation or 8R normal winning was won, which jackpot was won during the special game It is a directing effect. The promotion effect is executed during the period from time t _{SKK to} t _RDE after the start time t _S4R of the fourth round of the special game. In the promotion production, after displaying a guide image for prompting a continuous hitting operation of hitting the effect button 35, the operation on the operation button 35 is accepted, and the repeated hit operation is performed within the operation acceptance valid period of the effect button 35 as a notification condition. When the number of repeated hits within the operation acceptance valid period reaches a predetermined number (for example, 30 times), the operation result is notified.

More specifically, in the promotion effect, at time t _SKK , a character image of “charge the gauge to get a certain change” appears at the center of the screen. At time t _RDS , a horizontally long rectangular gauge image, an image imitating the effect button 35, an indicator image showing the progress status of the effect operation valid period of the effect button 35, and a guide image prompting the operation of the effect button 35 (" Character image). In the gauge image, the left end of the progress range in the gauge image is MIN, the right end of the progress range of the gauge image is MAX, and the probability of the probability variation jackpot is indicated by the progress amount between MIN and MAX.

In the promotion effect, the period from the time t _RDS to the time t _RDE is set as the operation reception valid period, and the time marker (the right end of the hatched area in the figure) in the indicator image moves to the right as the period elapses. move on. When the player repeatedly hits the effect button 35 within the valid operation reception period, the amount of progress in the gauge image advances to the right in accordance with the successive hits. When the number of repeated hits of the effect button 35 in the operation acceptance valid period reaches 30, the operation result is notified at the time when the number of repeated hits reaches a predetermined number. When the end time t _RDE of the operation reception valid period is reached before the number of repeated hits reaches 30, the operation result is _{notified at} the end time t _RDE . The mode of notifying the operation result includes promotion success and promotion failure.

  As shown in FIG. 21 (a), in the promotion of success in promotion, the amount of progress of the gauge reaches “MAX”, and character images of “success” and “congratulations on probability change” are displayed. When the production of successful promotion is executed in the special game, the game state after the end of the special game becomes the high-probability game state and the time saving game state.

  As shown in FIG. 21B, in the effect of promotion failure, the amount of progress of the gauge stops before "MAX" and the character image of "failure" is displayed. When the production of promotion failure is executed in the special game, the game state after the end of the special game becomes the low-probability game state and the time saving game state.

  Further, the gaming machine 1 may execute the prefetch hold display change effect when the change in the special symbol is suspended due to the start winning of the first start port 14 or the second start port 15. The look-ahead hold display change effect is an effect that suggests that there may be a big hit in the hold due to a change in the display mode of the hold display image 37.

As shown in FIGS. 22 (a) and 22 (b), in the look-ahead hold display change effect, a change in the special symbol is held due to a start winning, and the hold is held (FIGS. 22 (a) and 22 (b)). In the example, when the look-ahead hold display change effect having the change corresponding to the third hold of the first special symbol as the final change is executed, the time t immediately after the start of each change from the start winning to the final change _HH (in the example of FIGS. 22 (a) and 22 (b), a time t _HH (2) immediately after the start of the fluctuation immediately before the final fluctuation, a time t immediately after the start of the fluctuation immediately before the final fluctuation. _{At HH} (1) and time t _HH (0) immediately after the start of the final fluctuation, the display mode of the pending display image 37 corresponding to the final fluctuation changes to any of blue, green, and red. In the look-ahead pending display change effect, the reliability of the jackpot increases in the order of blue <green <red.

  As shown in FIG. 2, on the back surface of the gaming machine 1, a main control board 110, a production control board 120, a payout control board 130, a power board 170, a game information output terminal board 30, a power plug 171, a power switch (not shown). ), A RAM clear switch (not shown), and the like. When the activation operation is performed on the gaming machine 1, power is supplied from the power supply board 170 to the main control board 110, the effect control board 120, and the payout control board 130, and the boards 110, 120, and 130 are activated.

  The main control board 110 controls the basic operation of the gaming machine 1. The main control board 110 includes a one-chip microcomputer 110m, an input port (not shown), and an output port (not shown). The one-chip microcomputer 110m of the main control board 110 is composed of a main CPU 110a, a main ROM 110b, and a main RAM 110c.

  At the input port of the main control board 110, a payout control board 130, a general winning opening detection switch 12a, a gate detection switch 13a, a first starting opening detection switch 14a, a second starting opening detection switch 15a, a first big winning opening detection switch. 16a, a second special winning opening detection switch 17a, a door opening switch 18a, a magnetic detection sensor 18b, and a vibration detection sensor 18c are connected.

  In the output port of the main control board 110, the payout control board 130, the starting opening / closing solenoid 15c, the first big winning opening opening / closing solenoid 16c, the second big winning opening opening / closing solenoid 17c, the first special symbol display device 20, the second special The symbol display device 21, the normal symbol display device 22, the first special symbol hold indicator 23, the second special symbol hold indicator 24, the normal symbol hold indicator 25, and the game information output terminal board 30 are connected. The game information output terminal board 30 is for outputting the external output signal generated in the main control board 110 to a hall computer or the like of a game shop. The game information output terminal board 30 is provided with a connector for connecting to a hall computer or the like of a game store.

  The main CPU 110a of the main control board 110 reads out a program stored in the main ROM 110b based on an input signal from each detection switch or a timer and performs an arithmetic process. Further, the main CPU 110a directly controls the display devices 20 to 22 and the display devices 23 to 25, and transmits a command to another board according to the result of the arithmetic processing. When the start operation is performed, the main CPU 110a executes the initialization process, and after the initialization process is finished and the game is ready, the jackpot random number value (random number value in the random number range of 0 to 599), Special symbol random number value (random number value in the range of 0 to 99), reach determination random number value (random number value in the range of 0 to 99), special symbol variation random value (random number value in the range of 0 to 99) , While updating various random number values including normal symbol random number values (random number values in the random number range of 0 to 65535) within each random number range, variations in special symbols, variations in ordinary symbols, and games such as special games Control progress.

  Data such as a game control program is stored in the main ROM 110b of the main control board 110. In the main ROM 110b, a big hit determination table for the special symbol display devices 20 and 21, a hit determination table for the normal symbol display device 22, a symbol determination table, a variation pattern determination table, a preliminary determination table, a special game control table, a special winning opening. Various tables such as an opening / closing control table and a special game end setting table are stored. Details of these tables will be described later.

  The main RAM 110c of the main control board 110 functions as a data work area during arithmetic processing of the main CPU 110a. In the main RAM 110c, a special symbol reservation storage area, a special symbol special electric power processing data storage area, a stop symbol data storage area, a normal symbol reserved storage area, a universal figure normal electric power processing data storage area, a normal symbol data storage area, the number of rounds (R ) Storage area, special winning opening ball number (C) storage area, high probability game flag storage area, time saving game flag storage area, game state buffer, first special symbol hold number counter, second special symbol hold number counter, ordinary Various kinds of symbol hold number counter, high probability game number (X) counter, time saving number (J) counter, special symbol time counter, special game timer counter, normal symbol time counter, auxiliary game timer counter, transmission data storage area for production, etc. A storage area is provided. Here, when the power is cut off, the data in the used area of the main RAM 110c is backed up by the backup power supply after adding the checksum, and when the power is restored, the data backed up by the backup power supply is restored after the data check by the checksum. I'm supposed to get it.

  The power supply board 170 supplies a power supply voltage to the gaming machine 1 and also supplies a power failure detection signal indicating whether or not the power supply voltage has become a predetermined value or less to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 120. The power supply board 170 has a backup power supply including a capacitor. The power supply board 170 sets the power failure detection signal to a high level while the power supply voltage is higher than a predetermined value, and sets the power failure detection signal to a low level when the power supply voltage is equal to or lower than the predetermined value.

  The effect control board 120 controls various effects. The effect control board 120 receives the command generated by the main control board 110, and based on the received command, image display executed by the image display device 31, sound output executed by the audio output device 32, drive for effect. The operation performed by the devices 33a and 33b or the blinking performed by the production lighting device 34 is controlled. More specifically, the effect control board 120 is unidirectionally connected to the main control board 110 from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 120. The production control board 120 includes a sub CPU 120a, a sub ROM 120b, a sub RAM 120c, and an RTC 120d. The RTC 120d outputs a time signal indicating the current date and time to the sub CPU 120a. The RTC 120d operates by the supplied power when the game machine 1 is supplied with power, and operates by the power of the backup power supply mounted on the power supply board 170 when the game machine 1 is powered off.

  The sub CPU 120a reads out the program stored in the sub ROM 120b based on the command transmitted from the main control board 110 and the input signal from the timer to perform arithmetic processing, and also, based on the processing, outputs a corresponding command to the lamp. It is transmitted to the control board 140 and the image control board 150. The sub CPU 120a performs an initialization process when the activation operation is performed, and after the initialization process is completed and the game is ready, random number values 1 to 25 for presentation (each of which is a random number range of 0 to 99). Various kinds of random number values including 25 kinds of random number values with the like) are updated within each random number range, and effects according to the progress of the game are controlled. Here, the same random number value is not obtained as the random number values for presentation 1 to 25 at the same time.

  Data such as a production control program is stored in the sub ROM 120b of the production control board 120. Various tables such as a variation effect pattern determination table are stored in the sub ROM 120b. Details of these tables will be described later. The sub RAM 120c of the effect control board 120 functions as a data work area during the arithmetic processing of the sub CPU 120a. The sub RAM 120c is provided with various storage areas such as an effect information storage area, an effect symbol storage area, a symbol variation effect pattern storage area, a game state storage area, and an effect pattern storage area.

  The payout control board 130 controls the payout of gaming balls. The payout control board 130 is bidirectionally connected to the main control board 110. The payout control board 130 includes a one-chip microcomputer including a payout CPU, a payout ROM, and a payout RAM (not shown). The payout CPU reads out a program stored in the payout ROM based on an input signal from the payout ball counting switch 132 and a timer to perform arithmetic processing, and based on the processing, sends a corresponding command to the main control board 110. Send. To the output side of the payout control board 130, a payout motor 131 of a payout device for paying out a predetermined number of game balls from the storage part of the game balls is connected. Based on the command transmitted from the main control board 110, the payout CPU reads out a predetermined program from the payout ROM and performs arithmetic processing, and also controls the payout motor 131 of the payout device to pay out a predetermined game ball. At this time, the payout RAM functions as a work area for data during arithmetic processing of the payout CPU.

  The lamp control board 140 controls the production drive devices 33a and 33b and the production illumination device 34. The lamp control board 140 is connected to the effect control board 120, the effect drive devices 33a and 33b, and the effect illumination device 34. The lamp control board 140 controls the energization of drive sources such as solenoids and motors for operating the effect drive devices 33a and 33b based on various commands transmitted from the effect control board 120, and lights the effect illumination device 34. Control and drive control of the motor for changing the irradiation direction of light are performed.

  The image control board 150 controls the image display device 31 and the audio output device 32. The image control board 150 is connected to the effect control board 120 so as to be capable of bidirectional communication. The image control board 150 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, a VDP, and an acoustic DSP (not shown). The CPU of the image control board 150 executes the program stored in the ROM while using the RAM as a work area. When the command is transmitted from the effect control board 120, the CPU controls the operation of the VDP and the acoustic DSP by generating a control signal according to the content of the command and outputting the control signal to the VDP and the acoustic DSP.

  The VDP of the image control board 150 includes an image ROM that stores material data necessary for generating an image, a drawing engine that executes an image drawing process, and an output that outputs an image drawn by the drawing engine to the image display device 31. It has a circuit. The drawing engine draws an image in the frame buffer using the material data stored in the image ROM based on the control signal from the CPU. The output circuit outputs the image drawn in the frame buffer to the image display device 31 at a predetermined timing.

  The acoustic DSP of the image control board 150 is connected to an acoustic ROM for storing various acoustic data relating to music, voice, sound effects, etc., and an SDRAM used as a work area for data processing by the acoustic DSP. The acoustic DSP reads out acoustic data corresponding to the control signal from the CPU from the acoustic ROM to the SDRAM, executes data processing, and amplifies the sound signal obtained by this data processing with a gain corresponding to the control signal from the CPU. Then, the amplified sound signal is output to the audio output device 32.

Next, the operation of the gaming machine 1 according to this embodiment will be described.
FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the main control board 110 of the gaming machine 1. The main process is started when power is supplied from the power supply board 170 to the main control board 110 by a start operation and a system reset occurs in the main CPU 110a of the main control board 110.

  In FIG. 23, the main CPU 110a performs an initialization process (S10). In the initialization process, the main CPU 110a reads and executes the game control program from the main ROM 110b when the power is turned on. In the initialization processing, the main CPU 110a saves the RAM clear switch (not shown) on the rear surface of the gaming machine 1 at the time of power-on, and saves it in the main RAM 110c in the power-off monitoring processing (S20) at the previous power failure. Then, based on the information of the power failure occurrence and the contents of the checksum that are backed up, it is determined whether the data needs to be restored. If it is determined that the restoration is not necessary, the main RAM 110c is cleared and it is determined that the restoration is necessary. In this case, the data in the main RAM 110c is restored.

  Next, the main CPU 110a performs a power interruption monitoring process (S20). In the power-off monitoring process, the main CPU 110a monitors whether or not power-off of the gaming machine 1 has occurred, and when power-off occurs, a firing mechanism (touch sensor 3a, firing volume 3b, firing solenoid 4a, And, the ball feeding solenoid 4b) stops the firing of the game ball, clears the output port, stops the payout of the game ball by the payout device, creates and saves a checksum in each storage area of the main RAM 110c, and power-off occurrence information. After performing a series of processes for setting, the access to the main RAM 110c is set to be prohibited to prepare for power-off.

  Next, the main CPU 110a performs a game random number value update process (S30). In the game random number value update process, the main CPU 110a updates the reach determination random value and the special figure variation random value. Next, the main CPU 110a performs an initial random value updating process (S40). In the initial random number value update processing, the main CPU 110a updates the jackpot initial random number value, the normal symbol initial random number value, and the special symbol initial random number value.

  After that, the main CPU 110a repeats the loop process of steps S20 to S40. In addition to this loop processing, the main CPU 110a executes timer interrupt processing each time the reset clock pulse signal is generated by the reset clock pulse generation circuit.

  FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process of the main control board 110. The main CPU 110a of the main control board 110 executes timer interrupt processing at every 4 milliseconds which is a generation cycle of the reset clock pulse signal in the reset clock pulse generation circuit in the main control board 110.

  In FIG. 24, when the reset clock pulse signal is generated, the main CPU 110a saves the information in the register of the main CPU 110a at that time to the stack area (S100). Next, the main CPU 110a performs a time control process (S110). The time control process is a process of updating a counter used in the main RAM 110c for measuring various times. In the time control process, the main CPU 110a subtracts one from the special symbol time counter, the special game timer counter, the normal symbol time counter, and the auxiliary game timer counter in the main RAM 110c.

  Next, the main CPU 110a performs a random number update process (S120). In the random number update process, the main CPU 110a updates the jackpot random number value, the normal symbol random number value, and the special symbol random number value. More specifically, the main CPU 110a updates each random number counter by +1. When the added random number counter exceeds the maximum value of the random number range (when the random number counter makes one round), the random number counter is returned to 0 and each random number value is newly updated from the initial random number value at that time. ..

  After executing step S120, the main CPU 110a performs an initial random number value update process (S130). In the initial random number value update processing, the main CPU 110a updates the jackpot initial random number value, the normal symbol initial random number value, and the special symbol initial random number value.

  Next, the main CPU 110a performs an input control process (S200). In the input control process, the main CPU 110a, the general winning opening detection switch 12a, the first big winning opening detection switch 16a, the second big winning opening detection switch 17a, the first starting opening detecting switch 14a, the second starting opening detecting switch 15a, It is determined whether or not there is an input to various switches of the gate detection switch 13a, and if there is an input, predetermined data is set. Details of the procedure of the input control process will be described later.

  After the execution of step S200, the main CPU 110a performs special figure special power control processing (S300). In the special figure special power control processing, the main CPU 110a updates the value of the special figure special power processing data provided in the main RAM 110c in accordance with the progress of the game in the gaming machine 1, while performing the special symbol storage determination processing (special character special power processing. Data = 0 processing), special symbol variation processing (processing when special drawing special electric power processing data = 1), special symbol stop processing (processing when special character special electric power processing data = 2), jackpot game processing (special One of five processes of the figure special electric processing data = processing of 3) and the jackpot game ending processing (processing when special drawing special electric processing data = 4) is selected and executed. The details of the procedure of the special figure special power control processing will be described later.

  After the execution of step S300, the main CPU 110a performs a general / universal electric communication control process (S400). In the general / universal / universal control process, the main CPU 110a updates the value of the general / universal / universal process data provided in the main RAM 110c in accordance with the progress of the game in the gaming machine 1, and the normal symbol storage determination process Ordinary processing data = 0)), normal symbol variation processing (processing when Ordinary figure Ordinary processing data = 1), ordinary symbol stop processing (processing when Ordinary figure Ordinary processing data = 2), And, one of the four processing of the auxiliary game processing (processing when the general / universal processing data = 3) is selected and executed. The details of the general / universal / universal control process will be described later.

  After executing step S400, the main CPU 110a performs a payout control process (S500). In the payout control process, the main CPU 110a refers to the general winning award prize ball counter, the first starting prize award ball counter, and the second starting prize award ball counter in the main RAM 110c, and pays out the number of game balls indicated by each counter. A payout quantity designation command for instructing is generated and this command is transmitted to the payout control board 130. When the payout control board 130 receives the payout number designation command, it controls the payout motor 131 of the payout device to pay out the game balls.

  After executing step S500, the main CPU 110a performs a data generation process (S600). In the data generation process, the main CPU 110a outputs external output data, starting opening opening / closing solenoid data, first big winning opening opening / closing solenoid data, second big winning opening opening / closing solenoid data, special symbol display device data, ordinary symbol display device data. To generate.

  After executing step S600, the main CPU 110a performs an output control process (S700). In the output control processing, the main CPU 110a outputs signals for external output data, starting opening opening / closing solenoid data, first big winning opening opening / closing solenoid data, and second big winning opening opening / closing solenoid data created in the data generation processing of step S600. Perform port output processing. Further, in order to turn on the LEDs of the first special symbol display device 20, the second special symbol display device 21, and the normal symbol display device 22, the special symbol display device data and the normal symbol created in the data generation process of S600 described above. Display device output processing for outputting display device data is performed. Furthermore, the command transmission process which transmits the command set to the production | generation transmission data storage area of the main RAM110c to the production | generation control board 120 is also performed.

  After executing step S700, the main CPU 110a restores the information saved in the stack area in step S100 to the register of the main CPU 110a (S800).

  FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing details of the input control process. In FIG. 25, the main CPU 110a performs a general winning opening detection switch input process (S210). In the general winning opening detection switch input processing, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a detection signal is input from the general winning opening detection switch 12a. If no detection signal is input, the process directly proceeds to step S220. When the detection signal is input, a predetermined number (for example, 10) is added to the general winning award ball counter in the main RAM 110c to update it.

  After the execution of step S210, the main CPU 110a performs a special winning opening detection switch input process (S220). In the special winning opening detection switch input process, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a detection signal is input from the first special winning opening detection switch 16a or the second special winning opening detection switch 17a. When there is no detection signal input from either the first special winning opening detection switch 16a or the second special winning opening detection switch 17a, the main CPU 110a proceeds directly to the next step S230. When the detection signal is input from the first special winning opening detection switch 16a or the second special winning opening detection switch 17a, a predetermined number (for example, 15) is added to the special winning opening prize ball counter in the main RAM 110c. Then, the number is changed to +1 to update the special winning opening ball number (C) in the main RAM 110c special winning opening ball number (C) storage area.

  After executing step S220, the main CPU 110a performs a first starting opening detection switch input process (S230). In the first starting opening detection switch input process, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the detection signal is input from the first starting opening detection switch 14a. When the detection signal is not input from the first starting opening detection switch 14a, the main CPU 110a proceeds directly to the next step S240. When there is a detection signal input from the first starting opening detection switch 14a, the prize ball counter is updated, the determination whether the first special symbol hold number (U1) is less than 4, the first special symbol hold When the number (U1) is less than 4, the first special symbol reservation number (U1) is updated, the random number value is stored in the special symbol reservation storage area, pre-judgment of the jackpot lottery and start winning designation according to the judgment result A series of processes such as a set of commands, a set of special symbol holding number designating commands according to the first special symbol holding number (U1), and the like are performed. Details of the procedure of the first starting opening detection switch input processing will be described later.

  After executing step S230, the main CPU 110a performs a second starting opening detection switch input process (S240). In the second starting opening detection switch input process, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a detection signal is input from the second starting opening detection switch 15a. When the detection signal is not input from the second starting opening detection switch 15a, the main CPU 110a proceeds directly to the next step S250. When the detection signal is input from the second starting opening detection switch 15a, the prize ball counter is updated, the determination whether the second special symbol hold number (U2) is less than 4, the second special symbol hold When the number (U2) is less than 4, the second special symbol reservation number (U2) is updated, the random number value is stored in the special symbol reservation storage area, pre-judgment of the jackpot lottery and the start winning designation according to the judgment result A set of commands, a set of special symbol reservation number designation command according to the reservation number (U2) in the second special symbol reservation number (U2), and a series of processes are performed. The procedure of the second starting opening detection switch input processing and the procedure of the first starting opening detection switch input processing are the same except for the difference in the data write destination.

  Next, the main CPU 110a performs gate detection switch input processing (S250). In the gate detection switch input process, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a detection signal is input from the gate detection switch 13a. When there is no detection signal input from the gate detection switch 13a, the main CPU 110a ends the current input control process. When the detection signal is input from the gate detection switch 13a, the main CPU 110a generates a gate passage designation command, and sets the generated gate passage designation command in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Further, in this case, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the count value (G) of the normal symbol reservation number counter that counts the normal symbol reservation number (G) is less than 4. Then, if the count value (G) of the normal symbol reservation number counter is less than 4, the count value (G) is updated by +1 and the normal symbol random value is acquired, and the acquired normal symbol random value is normal. Stored in the symbol storage area.

  FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing details of the first starting opening detection switch input processing. In FIG. 26, when the detection signal is input from the first starting opening detection switch 14a (S230-1: Yes), the main CPU 110a proceeds to step S230-2. When the detection signal is not input from the first starting opening detection switch 14a (S230-1: No), the current first starting opening detection switch input process is ended.

  In step S230-2, the main CPU 110a adds a predetermined number (for example, 3) to the starting mouth prize ball counter and updates the counter (S230-2). After that, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the count value (U1) of the first special symbol reservation number counter that counts the first special symbol reservation number (U1) is less than 4 (S230-3).

  When the count value (U1) of the first special symbol holding number counter is not less than 4 (S230-3: No), the main CPU 110a ends the first starting opening detection switch input process of this time. Moreover, when the count value (U1) of the first special symbol reservation number counter is less than 4 (S230-3: Yes), the count value (U1) is incremented by +1 and updated (S230-4).

  After the execution of step S230-4, the main CPU 110a obtains the jackpot random number value, and stores the data in the first to fourth storage units of the first special symbol reserved storage area of the special symbol reserved storage area without storing the data and the most number. The small storage unit is used as a data storage destination, and the obtained jackpot random number value is stored in the data storage destination storage unit (S230-5).

  FIG. 27A is a diagram showing a special symbol reservation storage area. As shown in FIG. 27 (a), the special symbol reservation storage area is the 0th storage section corresponding to the variation, the first special symbol reservation storage area corresponding to the reservation of the first special symbol, and the second special symbol. It has a second special symbol hold storage area corresponding to the hold. Each of the first special symbol hold storage area and the second special symbol hold storage area, the first storage unit corresponding to the first hold, the second storage unit corresponding to the second hold, the third storage corresponding to the third hold And a fourth storage unit corresponding to the fourth hold. As shown in FIG. 27 (b), each storage unit in the special symbol reservation storage unit can store a set of a jackpot random number value, a special symbol random number value, a reach determination random number value, and a special symbol fluctuation random number value. It has become.

  After the execution of step S230-5, the main CPU 110a acquires the special symbol random number value, and stores the acquired special symbol random number value in the storage unit of the data storage destination in the first special symbol reserved storage area (S230-6). ..

  After the execution of step S230-6, the main CPU 110a acquires the special figure fluctuation random number value and the reach determination random value, and acquires the special figure fluctuation random number value and the reach determination random value in the first special symbol reserved storage area. The data is stored in the storage unit of the storage destination of the data (S230-7).

  After executing step S230-7, the main CPU 110a performs a preliminary determination process (S230-8). In this preliminary determination process, the main CPU 110a refers to the preliminary determination table of the main ROM 110b, and flags of the high-probability game flag storage area and the time saving game flag storage area at the time of execution of this step S230-8 (when the start condition is satisfied). Presence and absence of a set, jackpot random number value stored in the storage unit of the first special symbol reservation storage area in step S230-5 to S230-7, a special symbol random number value, a random number value for reach determination, and a random number value for special symbol fluctuation Based on the combination with, the winning information of the jackpot lottery that is triggered by the establishment of the starting condition of the first special symbol this time is determined.

  FIG. 28 is a diagram showing a pre-determination table for pre-determining the result of the jackpot lottery. Pre-determination table, jackpot random value, special symbol random value, gaming state (time saving game state or non-time saving game state), reach determination random value, special figure fluctuation random number value, winning information, and start winning designation command The set refers to when the starting condition of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 20 is satisfied and the one to refer to when the starting condition of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 21 is satisfied. It is memorized separately.

  After executing step S230-8, the main CPU 110a generates a start winning designation command corresponding to the winning information determined in the preliminary determination process of step S230-8, and sets the starting winning designation command in the production transmission data storage area. (S230-9). After that, the main CPU 110a refers to the count value (U1) of the first special symbol hold number counter, generates a special symbol hold number designation command indicating the first special symbol hold number (U1), and designates this special symbol hold number. The command is set in the production transmission data storage area (S230-10).

  The start winning award designation command and the special symbol hold number designation command set in the production transmission data storage area are transmitted to the production control board 120 in the output control process (S700) of the timer interrupt process. The effect control board 120 determines the content of the effect prior to the change of the special symbol based on the establishment of the start condition of the first special symbol this time, based on the description content of the start winning award designation command, and specifies the content of the determined effect. The command to perform is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140.

  Here, in the procedure of the second starting opening detection switch input process (S240), the reference of the reserved number in steps S230-3 and S230-4 is the second special symbol reserved number counter, steps S230-5 to S230. The storage destination of the random number value in -7 is the second special symbol reservation storage area, the reference destination of the random number value in step S230-8 is the second special symbol reservation storage area, and the number of reservations in step S230-10 Is the same as that of the first starting opening detection switch input process (S230) except that the reference destination of is the second special symbol reservation number counter.

  FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the details of the special figure special power control process. In FIG. 29, the main CPU 110a loads special figure special power processing data (S301). In the following step S302, the main CPU 110a refers to the branch address from the loaded special figure special electric power process data, and moves the process to the special symbol storage determination process (step S310) if the special figure special electric power process data = 0. If the special electric power processing data = 1, the process is moved to the special symbol variation processing (step S320), if the special electric power special data processing data = 2, the process is moved to the special symbol stop processing (step S330), the special electric power special processing data = If it is 3, the process is moved to the jackpot game process (step S340), and if the special figure special electricity process data = 4, the process is moved to the jackpot game end process (step S350).

  FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing details of the special symbol storage determination process. In FIG. 30, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the special symbols are being variably displayed (S310-1). More specifically, the main CPU 110a refers to the special symbol time counter in the main RAM 110c, and if the special symbol time counter is not 0, determines that the special symbol is being variably displayed, and the special symbol time counter is 0. If so, it is determined that the variable display of the special symbol is not being displayed. The main CPU 110a ends the special symbol storage determination process of this time when the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (S310-1: Yes). If the special symbols are not being variably displayed (S310-1: No), the process proceeds to step S310-2.

  In step S310-2, the main CPU 110a refers to the count value (U2) of the second special symbol reservation number counter of the main RAM 110c, and determines whether the second special symbol reservation number (U2) is 1 or more. When the second special symbol reservation number (U2) is 1 or more (S310-2: Yes), the main CPU 110a updates the count value (U2) of the second special symbol reservation number counter by -1 (S310-). 3). Here, the gaming machine 1 is a model in which the suspension of the variation of the second special symbol is digested with priority over the suspension of the variation of the first special symbol. In the gaming machine of such a model, during the time saving game state, even if the starting condition of the first special symbol is satisfied, the pre-judgment is not performed.

  When the count value (U2) of the second special symbol reservation number counter is not 1 or more (S310-2: No), the main CPU 110a refers to the count value (U1) of the first special symbol reservation number counter, and the first special It is determined whether the number of symbols reserved (U1) is 1 or more (S310-4).

  When the first special symbol reservation number (U1) is not 1 or more (S310-4: No), the main CPU 110a ends this special symbol storage determination process.

  When the first special symbol reservation number (U1) is 1 or more (S310-4: Yes), the main CPU 110a updates the count value (U1) of the first special symbol reservation number counter by -1 (S310-). 6). After executing step S310-3 or S310-6, the main CPU 110a performs a storage area shift process (S310-7). In this storage area shift processing, the main CPU 110a corresponds to one of the symbols obtained by subtracting the number of holdings in step S310-3 or S310-6, of the first special symbol holding storage area and the second special symbol holding storage area. The following processing is performed as a processing target.

  When the main CPU 110a subtracts the count value (U2) of the second special symbol reservation number counter in step S310-3, the data in the second to fourth storage units of the second special symbol reservation storage area is set to 1 for each. It shifts to the previous storage unit and writes the data in the first storage unit of the second special symbol reservation storage region to the 0th storage unit which is the determination storage region. By writing the data to the 0th storage unit, the random number values (big hit random number value, special symbol random number value, reach determination random number value, special figure fluctuation random number value) stored in the 0th storage unit until then are erased. To be done.

  Further, when the main CPU 110a subtracts the count value (U1) of the first special symbol reservation number counter in step S310-6, each of the data in the second to fourth storage units of the first special symbol reservation storage area To the previous storage unit, and the data in the first storage unit of the first special symbol reserved storage area is written to the 0th storage unit. By writing the data to the 0th storage unit, the random number values (big hit random number value, special symbol random number value, reach determination random number value, special figure fluctuation random number value) stored in the 0th storage unit until then are erased. To be done.

  After the execution of step S310-7, the main CPU 110a generates a special symbol reservation number designation command for notifying the production control board 120 of the first special symbol reservation number (U1) and the second special symbol reservation number (U2). , This special symbol reservation number designation command is set in the production transmission data storage area (S310-8).

  After executing step S310-8, the main CPU 110a performs a jackpot determination process (S311). In this jackpot determination process, the main CPU 110a determines the lottery result (jackpot or loss) of the jackpot lottery triggered by the establishment of the present start condition, determines the type of jackpot if it is a jackpot, and determines the jackpot. A big hit symbol designating command corresponding to the type of is generated and set in the production transmission data storage area. If it is a loss, a symbol designating command for the loss is generated and set in the effect transmission data storage area.

  More specifically, the main CPU 110a, in this jackpot determination process, as shown in the example of FIG. 31 (flowchart showing details of the jackpot determination process), the lottery result of the jackpot lottery triggered by the establishment of the present start condition. It is determined whether it is a big hit or a loss (S311-1). Specifically, the main CPU 110a refers to the jackpot lottery determination table in the main ROM 110b, determines whether or not a flag is set in the high-probability game flag storage area at the time of executing this step S311-1, and the 0th storage is performed in step S310-7. The lottery result is determined based on the combination with the jackpot random number value stored in the section.

  FIG. 32 (a) is a diagram showing the jackpot lottery determination table referred to in step S311-1. As shown in FIG. 32 (a), in the jackpot lottery determination table, a combination of a jackpot random number value and a lottery result (jackpot or loss) of the jackpot lottery is referred to in the low-probability gaming state and a high-probability gaming state. It is stored separately from the one referred to when.

  Comparing the number of jackpot random numbers that are jackpots in the low-probability gaming state and the number of jackpot random numbers that are jackpots in the high-probability gaming state in this jackpot lottery determination table, the jackpot random number value in the low-probability gaming state is "7. , And “8”, the jackpot random numbers in the high-probability gaming state are 20 “7” to “26”. The random number range of the jackpot random number value is 0 to 598. Therefore, the jackpot winning probability in the low-probability gaming state is 2/599 (= 1 / 299.5), and the jackpot winning probability in the high-probability gaming state is increased by 10 times to 20/599 (= 1 / 29.9).

  If the determination result of step S311-1 is a big hit (S311-1: Yes), the main CPU 110a proceeds to step S311-2, and if the determination result of step S311-1 is a loss (S311-1: 1). No), and proceeds to step S311-5.

  In step S311-2, the main CPU 110a performs a jackpot symbol determination process. In this jackpot symbol determination process, the main CPU 110a refers to the jackpot symbol determination table of the main ROM 110b, based on the special symbol random number value stored in the 0th storage unit in step S310-8, stop of the variation stop symbol The symbol data is determined, and the determined stop symbol data is stored in the stop symbol data storage area in the main RAM 110c. Here, the stop symbol data indicates a two-digit number (“00” to “07”) corresponding to the type of the special symbol that is stopped and displayed after a change.

  FIG. 33 (a) is a diagram showing a jackpot symbol determination table. In the big hit symbol determination table, a special symbol random number value, a type of special symbol (type of jackpot), a stop symbol data, and a set of symbol designation commands are the starting conditions of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 20. Are stored separately from those to be referred to when is established and those to be referred to when the starting condition of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 21 is satisfied.

  The effect symbol designating command is a command for notifying the effect control board 120 of the type of the special symbol which is stopped and displayed after the change.

  The stop symbol data stored in the stop symbol data storage area in this step S311-2 is the determination of the jackpot symbol in the special symbol stop process, the determination of the operation mode of the special winning opening in the jackpot game process, and the jackpot game end process. It is referred to when determining the game state. Details will be described later.

  Next, the main CPU 110a generates a symbol designating command for jackpot corresponding to the stop symbol data determined in step S311-2, and sets this symbol designating command in the effect transmission data storage area (S311-3).

  Next, the main CPU 110a obtains the game state at the present time (at the time of jackpot lottery) based on whether or not the flag is set in the high-probability game flag storage area and the time saving game flag storage area, and provides the game state information indicating the obtained game state. It is stored in the gaming state buffer (S311-4). Specifically, the main CPU 110a sets the data of "00H" in the game state buffer as the game state information when both the high probability game flag and the time saving game flag are not set. If the high-probability game flag is set and the time saving game flag is not set, the data "01H" is set in the game state buffer as the game state information. If the high probability game flag is not set and the time saving game flag is set, the data "02H" is set in the game state buffer as the game state information. When both the high probability game flag and the time saving game flag are set, the data "03H" is set in the game state buffer as the game state information.

  In step S311-5, the main CPU 110a performs a lost symbol determination process. In this lost symbol determination process, the main CPU 110a refers to the symbol determination table for lost in the main ROM 110b, determines the stopped symbol data of the stopped symbols of the lost, and stores the determined stopped symbol data in the stopped symbol data storage area.

  FIG. 33B is a diagram showing a symbol determination table for loss. In the symbol determination table for losing, a set of special symbol type, stop symbol data, and symbol designating command is referred to when the starting condition of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 20 is satisfied. The two special symbol display device 21 is stored separately from the one referred to when the starting condition of the second special symbol is satisfied.

  Next, the main CPU 110a generates a symbol designating command for loss corresponding to the stop symbol data determined in step S311-5, and sets the symbol designating command in the effect transmission data storage area (S311-6).

  Returning to the explanation of FIG. After executing the jackpot determination process (S311), the main CPU 110a performs a variation pattern determination process (S312). In the variation pattern determination process, the main CPU 110a refers to the variation pattern determination table of the main ROM 110b, and selects the lottery result (big hit or loss) of the jackpot lottery in step S311-1 and the time saving game flag storage area at the time of execution of this step S312. Whether or not a flag is set, the number of holdings (U2) or (U1) after the update in step S310-3 or step S310-6, the jackpot random number value stored in the 0th storage unit in step S310-7, and the reach determination random number value , And the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation based on the combination of the random numbers for special figure fluctuation.

  There are two types of variation pattern determination tables, one that is referred to when the first special symbol is varied and one that is referred to when the second special symbol is varied. FIG. 34 is a diagram showing a variation pattern determination table that is referred to when the first special symbol varies. FIG. 35 is a diagram showing a variation pattern determination table that is referred to when the second special symbol varies.

  The variation pattern determination table of the special symbol, the type of special symbol (type of jackpot), the gaming state (time saving game state or non-time saving game state), the number of holdings, reach determination random number value, special figure variation random number value, special The type of the variation pattern of the symbol, the variation time, and the variation start command set are stored. The variation start command is a command for notifying the effect control board 120 of the type of variation pattern.

  In the variation pattern determination table of the special symbol, when the lottery result of the big hit lottery is a big hit, it is easy to select a variation pattern having a long variation time. For example, in the variation pattern determination table of the first special symbol shown in FIG. 34, the variation pattern options corresponding to the special symbol 1 (per 16R probability variation) are variation pattern 11, variation pattern 12, variation pattern 13, variation pattern 15, variation There are seven types, pattern 16 and variation pattern 17.

  The variation pattern 11 is a pattern that develops into SP reach production with no pseudo continuous production (the number of pseudo variations is 0), and the variation time is T1. The variation pattern 12 develops into SP reach production after one pseudo variation of the pseudo continuous production, and the variation time is T2 (T2> T1). The variation pattern 13 develops into SP reach production through two pseudo variations of pseudo continuous production, and the variation time is T3 (T3> T2).

  The variation pattern 14 develops into SPSP reach production with no pseudo continuous production (the number of pseudo variations is 0), and the variation time is T4 (T4> T3). The variation pattern 15 develops into an SPSP reach production through one pseudo variation of the pseudo continuous production, and the variation time is T5 (T5> T4). The variation pattern 16 develops into SPSP reach production through two pseudo variations of the pseudo continuous production, and the variation time is T6 (T6> T5).

  The variation pattern 17 develops into a full-rotation reach production after three pseudo variations of the pseudo continuous production, and the variation time is T7. Of these, the magnitude relationship of the six types of selection rates excluding the variation pattern 17 that is the jackpot confirmation effect is variation pattern 11 <variation pattern 12 <variation pattern 13 <variation pattern 14 <variation pattern 15 <variation pattern 16. There is.

  Moreover, in the variation pattern determination table of the special symbol, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a loss, it is difficult to select a variation pattern having a long variation time. For example, in the variation pattern determination table of the first special symbol shown in FIG. 34, the variation corresponding to the combination of special symbol 0 (miss), non-time saving game state, reach (reach determination random number value is “70 to 99”) There are seven types of pattern options: variation pattern 9, variation pattern 1, variation pattern 2, variation pattern 3, variation pattern 4, variation pattern 5, and variation pattern 6.

  The variation pattern 9 is lost without developing after the normal reach effect, and the variation time is T9 (T9 <T1).

  The variation pattern 1 is a pattern that develops into an SP reach production with no pseudo continuous production (the number of pseudo variations is 0), and the variation time is T1. The variation pattern 2 develops into the SP reach production through one pseudo variation of the pseudo continuous production, and the variation time is T2. The variation pattern 3 develops into an SP reach production through two pseudo variations of the pseudo continuous production, and the variation time is T3.

  The variation pattern 4 develops into SPSP reach production with no pseudo continuous production (the number of pseudo variations is 0), and the variation time is T4. The variation pattern 5 develops into the SPSP reach production through one pseudo variation of the pseudo continuous production, and the variation time is T5. The variation pattern 6 develops into the SPSP reach production through two pseudo variations of the pseudo continuous production, and the variation time is T6.

  The magnitude relationship among these seven types of selection rates is: variation pattern 9 <variation pattern 1 <variation pattern 2 <variation pattern 3 <variation pattern 4 <variation pattern 5 <variation pattern 6.

  Further, when comparing the variation pattern determination table of the special symbol and the pre-determination table (FIG. 28) shown above, in the pre-determination table, the number of pending variations of the first special symbol (U1) and the second special symbol The corresponding data in the table can be searched without referring to the number of pending changes (U2). On the other hand, in the variation pattern determination table, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is lost, the number of pending changes of the first special symbol (U1) and the number of pending changes of the second special symbol (U2) are not referred to. As long as you can not find the corresponding data in the table. Therefore, in the pre-determination table, the type of reach can be determined, but the "normal variation" and the "shortening variation" cannot be determined.

  In FIG. 30, the main CPU 110a generates a fluctuation start command corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined in step S312, and sets the fluctuation start command in the effect transmission data storage area (S313).

  Next, the main CPU 110a obtains the current game state based on the presence / absence of flags set in the high-probability game flag storage area and the time saving game flag storage area, and generates a game state designation command corresponding to the obtained game state, This game state designation command is set in the production transmission data storage area (S314).

  Next, the main CPU 110a performs a process for starting variable display of special symbols (S315). To be more specific, the main CPU 110a causes the first special symbol display device 20 or the second special symbol display device 21 to perform variable display (blinking of the LED) of the special symbol in a predetermined processing area. set. When the variable display data is set in the predetermined processing area, the data for turning on or off the LED is created in step S600, and the created data is output in step S700, whereby the first special symbol display device 20. Alternatively, the variable display of the second special symbol display device 21 is performed.

  Next, the main CPU 110a sets the variation time based on the variation pattern determined in step S312 in the special symbol time counter (S316). The special symbol time counter is subjected to subtraction processing every 4 ms in step S110.

  Next, the main CPU 110a sets the special symbol special electric power process data = 1 (S317), and ends the special symbol storage determination process of this time. In the special figure special power control process after this, the process moves to the special symbol variation process in step S302, and the special symbol variation process is performed.

  FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing details of the special symbol variation process. In FIG. 36, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the change time of the special symbol has elapsed (S320-1). Specifically, the main CPU 110a refers to the special symbol time counter set in step S316, determines that the special symbol variation time has elapsed if the special symbol time counter is 0, and the special symbol time counter is 0. If not, it is determined that the variation time of the special symbol has not yet passed. When determining that the variation time of the special symbol has elapsed (S320-1: Yes), the main CPU 110a proceeds to step S320-2. Further, when it is determined that the variation time of the special symbol has not elapsed (S320-1: No), the special symbol variation process of this time is ended, and the next subroutine is executed.

  In step S320-2, the main CPU 110a performs a process for stopping the variable display of the special symbol. More specifically, the main CPU 110a clears the variable display data set in step S315, and sets the special symbol set in step S311-2 or S311-5 to the first special symbol display device 20 or the special symbol. 2 Stop symbol data for stop display on the special symbol display device 21 is set in a predetermined processing area (S320-2). Thereby, the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 20 or the second special symbol display device 21.

  Next, the main CPU 110a sets a variation stop command in the effect transmission data storage area (S320-3).

  Next, the main CPU 110a sets the symbol stop time (0.5 seconds = 125 counter) in the special symbol time counter (S320-4). The special symbol time counter is subjected to subtraction processing every 4 ms in step S110.

  Next, the main CPU 110a sets 2 to the special figure special electric power process data (S320-5), and ends the special symbol variation process of this time. In the special symbol special electric control process thereafter, the process moves to the special symbol stop process in step S302, and the special symbol stop process is performed.

  FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing details of the special symbol stop processing. In FIG. 37, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed (S330-1). Specifically, the main CPU 110a refers to the special symbol time counter set in step S320-4, determines that the special symbol stop time has elapsed if the special symbol time counter is 0, the special symbol time counter is If it is not 0, it is determined that the stop time of the special symbol has not yet elapsed. When determining that the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed (S330-1: Yes), the main CPU 110a proceeds to step S330-2. Further, when it is determined that the stop time of the special symbol has not elapsed (S330-1: No), the special symbol stop process of this time is ended, and the next subroutine is executed.

  In step S330-2, the main CPU 110a performs a time saving game end determination process. In the time saving game end determination processing, the main CPU 110a confirms whether the time saving game flag is set in the time saving game flag storage area. When the time saving game flag is not set in the time saving game flag storage area, the process directly proceeds to the next step S330-3. When the time saving game flag is set in the time saving game flag storage area, the time saving time (J) in the time saving time (J) storage area is updated by -1 and the updated time saving time (J) is 0. Determine whether or not. As a result, when the number of time saving (J) is 0, the time saving game flag set in the time saving game flag storage area is cleared and then the process proceeds to the next step S330-3. When the number of time saving (J) is not "0", the process proceeds to the next step S330-3 while setting the time saving game flag in the time saving game flag storage area.

  In step S330-3, the main CPU 110a performs a high-probability game end determination process. In this high-probability game end determination processing, the main CPU 110a confirms whether or not the high-probability game flag is set in the high-probability game flag storage area. If the high-probability game flag is not set in the high-probability game flag storage area, the process directly proceeds to the next step S330-4. When the high-probability game flag is set in the high-probability game flag storage area, the high-probability game count (X) in the high-probability game count (X) storage area is updated by -1 to update the high-probability after update. It is determined whether or not the number of games (X) is 0. As a result, when the number of high-probability games (X) is 0, the high-probability game flag set in the high-probability game flag storage area is cleared and then the process proceeds to the next step S330-4. If the high-probability game count (X) is not 0, the process proceeds to the next step S330-4 with the high-probability game flag set in the high-probability game flag storage area.

  In step S330-4, the main CPU 110a obtains the current game state based on the presence / absence of flags set in the high-probability game flag storage area and the time saving game flag storage area, and issues a game state designation command corresponding to the obtained game state. Generate and set this game state designation command in the production transmission data storage area.

  Next, the main CPU 110a determines whether the stop symbol data in the stop symbol data storage area is a big hit or a lost one (S330-5). If the stop symbol data in the stop symbol data storage area is a missing item (S330-5: No), the main CPU 110a sets 0 to the special symbol special power processing data (S330-6), and stops this special symbol. The process ends. In the special symbol special electric control process thereafter, the process moves to the special symbol storage determination process in step S302, and the special symbol storage determination process is performed.

  When the stop symbol data in the stop symbol data storage area is a big hit (S330-5: Yes), the main CPU 110a sets 3 to the special symbol special power processing data (S330-10). Next, the main CPU 110a resets the game state, the high probability game number (X), and the time saving number (J) at that time (S330-11). More specifically, the main CPU 110a clears the data in the high-probability game flag storage area and the high-probability game count (X) storage area when the high-probability game flag storage area has the high-probability game flag set. .. Further, when the time saving game flag is set in the time saving game flag storage area, the main CPU 110a clears the data in the time saving game flag storage area and the time saving number (J) storage area.

  After the execution of step S330-11, the main CPU 110a performs a jackpot start preparation setting process (S330-12). In the jackpot start preparation setting process, the main CPU 110a refers to the special game control table of the main ROM 110b, and based on the stop symbol data in the stop symbol data storage area, the 16R big winning opening / closing control table, the 8R big hit The winning prize opening / closing control table and the large winning prize opening / closing control table for 2R are determined as reference destinations.

  FIG. 38 is a diagram showing a special game control table. FIG. 39 (a) is a diagram showing a special winning opening / closing control table for 16R. FIG. 39 (b) is a diagram showing a special winning opening / closing control table for 8R. FIG. 39C is a diagram showing a special winning opening / closing control table for 2R.

  In the special game control table, a set of stop symbol data, opening time, a table number of a reference big winning opening / closing control table, and an ending time are stored for each type of jackpot. Here, the table number of the special winning opening opening / closing control table for 16R is 01, the table number of the special winning opening opening / closing control table for 8R is 02, and the table number of the special winning opening opening / closing control table for 2R is It is 03.

  In the special winning opening / closing control table for 16R, data indicating the opening time and closing time of the first round to the 16th round per 16R, and the type of the special winning opening to be opened are stored. The special winning opening / closing control table for 8R stores data indicating the opening time and closing time of the first round to the eighth round per 8R, and the type of the special winning opening to be opened. The special winning opening / closing control table for 2R stores data indicating the opening time and closing time of the first round to the second round per 2R, and the type of the special winning opening to be opened.

  The main CPU 110a determines the type of jackpot based on the jackpot opening / closing control table determined in step S330-12, generates an opening designation command according to the type of jackpot, and transmits the opening designation command to the performance transmission data. It is set in the storage area (S330-13).

  Based on the special winning opening / closing control table determined in step S330-12, the main CPU 110a determines a start interval time according to the type of jackpot, and sets this start interval time in the special symbol time counter (S330-14). ), The special symbol stop processing of this time is ended. In the special figure special power control process thereafter, the process shifts to the big hit game process in step S302, and the big hit game process is performed.

  FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing details of the jackpot game process. In FIG. 39, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the opening is currently being performed (S340-1). Specifically, the main CPU 110a refers to the number of rounds (R) in the number of rounds (R) storage area, and if the number of rounds (R) is 0, determines that the opening is in progress, and the number of rounds (R). If is not 0, it is determined that the opening is not in progress. The main CPU 110a proceeds to step S340-2 when it is being opened (S340-1: Yes). If the opening is not in progress (S340-1: No), the process proceeds to step S340-6.

  In step S340-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether the start interval time has elapsed. Specifically, the main CPU 110a refers to the special symbol time counter set in step S330-14 of the special symbol stop processing, determines that the start interval time has elapsed if the special symbol time counter is 0, and special If the symbol time counter is not 0, it is determined that the start interval time has not yet elapsed. When determining that the start interval time has elapsed (S340-2: Yes), the main CPU 110a proceeds to step S340-3. If it is determined that the start interval time has not yet elapsed (S340-2: No), the jackpot game process of this time is ended.

  In step S340-3, the main CPU 110a performs a jackpot start setting process. In the jackpot start setting process, the main CPU 110a updates the number of rounds (R) in the number of rounds (R) storage area by +1. Here, at the time when the start interval time has elapsed, no operation has been performed yet, and the number of rounds (R) in the number of rounds (R) storage area is 0. Therefore, the number of rounds (R) after the update in this step S340-3 becomes 1.

  After executing step S340-3, the main CPU 110a performs a special winning opening opening process (S340-4). In this special winning opening opening process, in order to open the first big winning opening opening / closing door 16b or the second big winning opening opening / closing door 17b, the first big winning opening opening / closing solenoid 16c or the second big winning opening opening / closing solenoid 17c is energized. Set the energization data. Further, the main CPU 110a refers to the special winning opening / closing control table determined in step S330-12 to obtain the opening time of the first special winning opening 16 or the second special winning opening 17 in the current round number (R). , This opening time is set in the special game timer counter.

  After executing step S340-4, the main CPU 110a performs a round start command transmission determination process (S340-5). In the round start command transmission determination process, the main CPU 110a generates a round start command according to the number of rounds (R) in the number of rounds (R) storage area, and sets this round start command in the transmission data storage area for effect. , This big hit game processing ends.

  In step S340-6, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the ending is currently in progress. When the main CPU 110a determines that the ending is not in progress (S340-6: No), the process proceeds to step S340-7. If it is determined that the ending is in progress (S340-6: Yes), the process proceeds to step S340-18.

  In step S340-7, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the special winning opening is closed (S340-7). Specifically, if the energization data (the energization data for energizing the first big winning opening opening / closing solenoid 16c or the second big winning opening opening / closing solenoid 17c) is not set in the predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, the main CPU 110a outputs a large value. It is determined that the winning opening is closed, and if energization data is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, it is determined that the special winning opening is not closed. When the special winning opening is being closed (S340-7: Yes), the main CPU 110a proceeds to step S340-8. If the special winning opening is not closed (S340-7: No), the process proceeds to step S340-9.

  In step S340-8, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the closing time has elapsed. Here, the closing time is set in the special game timer counter in step S340-10 described later. When the main CPU 110a determines that the closing time has elapsed (S340-8: Yes), the main CPU 110a proceeds to the special winning opening opening process of step S340-4, and the big winning opening opening process and the subsequent round start command transmission determining process (S340). -5) is performed and the jackpot game process of this time is ended. When determining that the closing time has not elapsed (S340-8: No), the main CPU 110a ends the jackpot game process of this time.

  In step S340-9, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the conditions for ending the opening of the special winning opening are satisfied. Specifically, the main CPU 110a opens the special winning opening ball number (C) in the special winning opening ball number (C) storage area when it reaches a prescribed number (9) or when the opening time has elapsed. It is determined that the end condition is satisfied. Further, the main CPU 110a does not reach the specified number (9) of the special winning opening balls (C) in the special winning opening ball number (C) storage area, and the opening time has not elapsed. In this case, it is determined that the opening end condition is not satisfied. When the main CPU 110a determines that the opening end condition is satisfied (S340-9: Yes), the process proceeds to step S340-10. Further, when it is determined that the opening end condition is not satisfied (S340-9: No), the jackpot game process of this time is ended.

  In step S340-10, the main CPU 110a performs a special winning opening closing process. In the special winning opening closing process, the main CPU 110a closes the first special winning opening opening / closing door 16b or the second special winning opening opening / closing door 17b, so as to close the first special winning opening opening / closing solenoid 16c or the second large winning opening opening / closing solenoid. The energization data for energizing 17c is stopped. Further, the main CPU 110a refers to the special winning opening / closing control table determined in step S330-12, and determines whether the first special winning opening 16 or the second special winning opening 17 is based on the current round number (R). The closing time is set in the special game timer counter. As a result, the special winning opening will be closed.

  After the execution of step S340-10, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not one round game has ended (S340-11). Specifically, the main CPU 110a, when the special winning opening ball number (C) in the special winning opening ball number (C) storage area reaches a prescribed number (9), one round game is executed. Determined as finished. Further, the main CPU 110a ends one round game when the special winning opening ball number (C) in the special winning opening ball number (C) storage area does not reach the prescribed number (9). Determine not. When the main CPU 110a determines that one round game has ended (S340-11: Yes), the process proceeds to step S340-12. When it is determined that one round game is not finished (S340-11: No), the jackpot game process of this time is finished.

  In step S340-12, the main CPU 110a performs a round data initialization process. In the round data initialization process, the main CPU 110a resets the special winning opening ball number (C) in the special winning opening ball number (C) storage area to 0.

  After the execution of step S340-12, the main CPU 110a causes the number of rounds (R) in the number of rounds (R) storage area to be the maximum value (specifically, the final number of the special winning opening / closing control table determined in step S330-12). The number of rounds) is determined (S340-13).

  When determining that the number of rounds (R) is not the maximum value (S340-13: No), the main CPU 110a updates the number of rounds (R) in the number of rounds (R) storage area by +1 (S340). -14), the jackpot game process of this time is ended.

  When determining that the number of rounds (R) has reached the maximum value (S340-13: Yes), the main CPU 110a resets the number of rounds (R) in the number of rounds (R) storage area to 0 (S340- 15).

  After executing step S340-15, the main CPU 110a determines the type of jackpot based on the jackpot opening / closing control table determined in step S330-12, and generates an ending designation command according to the type of jackpot, This ending designation command is set in the production transmission data storage area (S340-16).

  After the execution of step S340-16, the main CPU 110a determines the end interval time (for example, 2 seconds) according to the type of jackpot, and sets this end interval time in the special game timer counter (S340-17).

  After executing step S340-17, or when determining that the ending is in progress in step S340-6 (S340-6: Yes), the main CPU 110a determines whether the end interval time has elapsed (S340-). 18). Specifically, the main CPU 110a refers to the special game timer counter set in step S340-17, determines that the end interval time has elapsed if the special game timer counter is 0, and sets the special game timer counter to 0. If not, it is determined that the end interval time has not yet elapsed. When determining that the end interval time has not yet elapsed (S340-18: No), the main CPU 110a ends the jackpot game process of this time.

  When determining that the end interval time has elapsed (S340-18: Yes), the main CPU 110a sets 4 to the special figure special electric power processing data (S340-19), and ends the special symbol variation processing this time. In the special figure special power control process thereafter, the process moves to the big hit game end process in step S302, and the big hit game end process is performed.

  FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing details of the jackpot game ending process. In FIG. 41, the main CPU 110a loads the stop symbol data set in the stop symbol data storage area in step S311-2 and the game information set in the game state buffer in step S311-4 (S350-1).

  After executing step S350-1, the main CPU 110a performs a high-probability game flag setting process (S350-2). In the high probability game flag setting process, the main CPU 110a refers to the special game end time setting table of the main ROM 110b, and based on the stop symbol data and the game information loaded in step S350-1, the high probability at the end of the special game. The necessity of setting the game flag is determined.

  FIG. 42 is a diagram showing a setting table at the end of the special game. The special game end time setting table, stop symbol data, data indicating the storage contents of the game state buffer, data indicating the necessity of the time saving game state, data indicating the number of time saving games, data indicating the necessity of the high probability state, And, a set of data indicating the number of high probability games is stored.

  Specifically, in step S350-1, when the stop symbol data loaded in step S350-1 is "01-02, 04-06", the high-probability game flag is set in the high-probability game flag storage area. If it is "03, 07" other than that, the high-probability game flag is not set in the high-probability game flag storage area.

  After the execution of step S350-2, the main CPU 110a performs a high-probability game number setting process (S350-3). In the high-probability game state setting process, the main CPU 110a refers to the special game end time setting table of the main ROM 110b, and based on the stop symbol data and the game information loaded in step S350-1, the number of games at the end of the special game ( X) The number of remaining fluctuations (X) to be stored in the storage area is determined.

  Specifically, in step S350-2, when the stop symbol data loaded in step S350-1 is "01-02, 04-06", 10000 times is set in the game count (X) storage area, If the value is "03, 07" other than that, 0 is set in the number-of-games (X) storage area.

  After the execution of step S350-3, the main CPU 110a performs a time saving game flag setting process (S350-4). In the time saving game flag setting process, the main CPU 110a refers to the special game ending time setting table of the main ROM 110b, and based on the stop symbol data and the game information loaded in step S350-1, the time saving game flag at the time of ending the special game. Decide whether or not to set.

  Specifically, in step S350-3, if the stop symbol data loaded in step S350-1 is "01-07", the time saving game flag is set in the time saving game flag storage area.

  After executing step S350-4, the main CPU 110a performs a time saving number setting process (S350-5). In the time saving number setting process, the main CPU 110a refers to the special game end time setting table of the main ROM 110b, and based on the stop symbol data and the game information loaded in step S350-1, the number of games (J) at the end of the special game. The number of remaining fluctuations (J) stored in the storage area is determined.

  Specifically, in this step S350-4, when the stop symbol data loaded in step S350-1 is "01-02, 04-06", 10000 times is set in the game count (J) storage area. If it is "03, 07" other than that, 100 times is set in the number-of-games (J) storage area.

  After the execution of step S350-5, the main CPU 110a obtains the current game state based on whether or not the flag is set in the high-probability game flag storage area and the time saving game flag storage area, and specifies the game state corresponding to the current game state. A command is generated, and this game state designation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area (S350-6).

  After the execution of step S350-6, the main CPU 110a sets 0 to the special figure special electric power processing data (S350-7), and ends the jackpot game ending processing. In the special symbol special electric control process thereafter, the process moves to the special symbol storage determination process in step S302, and the special symbol storage determination process is performed.

  FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the details of the general / universal communication control process. In FIG. 43, the main CPU 110a loads general / universal / universal processing data (S401). In the following step S402, the main CPU 110a refers to the branch address from the loaded special drawing special electric power processing data, and if the general / universal / universal electric power processing data = 0, moves the processing to the normal symbol memory determination processing, the general / universal electric power processing If the data = 1, the process is transferred to the normal symbol variation process, if the general / universal data process data = 2, the process is transferred to the normal symbol stop process, and if the general / universal process data process = 3, to the auxiliary game process Transfer processing.

  The outline of the normal symbol storage determination process, the normal symbol variation process, the normal symbol stop process, and the auxiliary game process is as follows. In the normal symbol storage determination process (process of general / universal / general electric power processing data = 0), the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the count value (G) of the normal symbol reservation number counter is 1 or more. If the count value (G) of the normal symbol reservation number counter is 0, the current normal symbol storage determination process is ended. If the count value (G) of the normal symbol hold number counter is 1 or more, after updating the count value (G) of the normal symbol hold number counter by -1, the second to the second in the normal symbol hold storage area The data in the fourth storage unit is shifted to the previous storage unit, and the data in the first storage unit is written in the zeroth storage unit. At this time, the normal symbol random value that has already been written in the 0th storage section of the normal symbol reservation storage area will be erased. After that, the main CPU 110a refers to the normal symbol lottery determination table of the main ROM 110b, and based on the combination of the presence or absence of a flag set in the time saving game flag storage area and the normal symbol random value in the 0th storage section of the normal symbol holding storage area. Then, determine the lottery result of the normal symbol lottery (win or lose), and change the normal symbol according to this lottery result (29 seconds in the non-time saving game state, 0.2 seconds in the time saving game state) decide.

  FIG. 32 (b) is a diagram showing a normal symbol lottery determination table. The ordinary symbol lottery determination table is stored in the main ROM 110b of the main control board 110. In the normal symbol lottery determination table, the set of the random number value of the ordinary symbol and the lottery result of the ordinary symbol lottery (hit or loss) is to be referred to when it is in the non-time saving game state and when it is in the time saving game state. It is stored separately.

  Comparing the number of normal symbol determination random number value that hits in the non-time saving game state in this normal symbol lottery determination table and the number of normal symbol determination random number value that hits in the time saving game state, the hit in the non-time saving game state While the normal symbol determination random number value is only one (0), the normal symbol determination random number value per hit in the time saving game state is 65535 (0 to 65534). The random number range of the random number for normal symbol determination is 0 to 65535. Therefore, the winning probability in the non-time saving game state is 1/65536, and the winning probability in the time saving game state is 65535/65536 = 1 / 1.00002.

  After determining the lottery result of the normal symbol lottery, the main CPU 110a sets the ordinary symbol variation time in the ordinary symbol time counter and starts the variation of the ordinary symbol of the ordinary symbol display device 22, and the ordinary symbol ordinary electricity processing data is set to 1 Set.

  In the normal symbol variation process (process when the universal symbol data processing process = 1), the main CPU 110a determines whether the normal symbol variation time has elapsed (whether the normal symbol time counter has become 0), and the normal symbol variation When it is determined that the time has not elapsed, the current normal symbol variation process ends. When it is determined that the normal symbol variation time has elapsed, the normal symbol of the normal symbol display device 22 is stopped and displayed as a symbol according to the ordinary symbol lottery result, and a predetermined ordinary symbol stop time is set in the ordinary symbol time counter, Fig. 2 Set 2 in the data for processing data.

  In the normal symbol stop process (process when the general pattern normal electric power process data = 2), the main CPU 110a determines whether the normal symbol stop time has elapsed (whether the normal symbol time counter has become 0), and the normal symbol stop When it is determined that the time has not elapsed, the normal symbol stop processing of this time is ended. When it is determined that the normal symbol stop time has elapsed, it is determined whether or not the stop symbol of the normal symbol display device 22 is a winning symbol. If the stop symbol of the normal symbol display device 22 is not a winning symbol, 0 is set in the normal symbol / general electric power processing data, and if the stop symbol of the normal symbol indicator device 22 is a winning symbol, Set 3 to the normal processing data.

  In the auxiliary game process (process when the normal / universal process data = 3), the main CPU 110a opens the second starting opening 15 (0.2 seconds in the non-time saving game state, in the time saving game state). (3.5 seconds), the second starting port 15 is opened for this opening time, and then the second starting port 15 is closed, and 0 is set to the universal figure processing data.

  FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the effect control board 120 of the gaming machine 1. The main processing is started when a system reset is generated from the power supply board 170 to the sub CPU 120a of the effect control board 120 by the activation operation.

  In FIG. 44, the sub CPU 120a performs an initialization process (S1000). In the initialization process, the sub CPU 120a loads the startup program from the sub ROM 120b and initializes various flags in the sub RAM 120c in response to power-on. After the completion of the initialization process, the sub CPU 120a repeats the process (S1100) of updating the random number values 1 to 25 for effect. In addition to the updating process of the random number value, the sub CPU 120a executes a timer interrupt process each time the reset clock pulse signal is generated by the reset clock pulse generation circuit.

  FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process of the effect control board 120. The sub CPU 120a of the effect control board 120 is shown in FIG. 45 every 2 milliseconds which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse generator in the effect control board 120 after the initialization process is completed and the game is enabled. Perform a series of processes.

  In FIG. 40, the sub CPU 120a saves the information in the register of the sub CPU 120a in the stack area (S1400).

  Next, the sub CPU 120a performs a timer update process (S1500). In the timer updating process, the sub CPU 120a updates the various counters by -1 based on the time signal input from the RTC 120d.

  Next, the sub CPU 120a performs command analysis processing (S1600). In the command analysis process, the sub CPU 120a analyzes the command in the reception buffer, and based on the analysis result, the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, the drive devices 33a and 33b for effect, and the illumination device 34 for effect. The content of the effect is determined, and a command indicating the determined content of the effect is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c. Details of the command analysis process will be described later.

  Next, the sub CPU 120a performs effect input control processing (S1700). In the effect input control process, the sub CPU 120a performs a process according to the input signals of the detection buttons 35a, 39a, 39b, 39c, 39d, and 39e of the effect button 35, the cross key 39, and the center key 39E. Details of the effect input control process will be described later.

  Next, the sub CPU 120a performs a data output process (S1800). In the data output process, the sub CPU 120a transmits the command stored in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c in the command analysis process of step S1600 and the effect input control process of step S1700 to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140.

  Next, the sub CPU 120a restores the information saved in the stack area in step S1400 to the register of the sub CPU 120a (S1900).

  46, 47, and 48 are flowcharts showing the details of the command analysis process (step S1600 in FIG. 40). In FIG. 46, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether or not there is a command received from the main control board 110 in the reception buffer (S1601). If there is a command in the reception buffer (S1601: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1610. If there is no command in the reception buffer (S1601: No), the command analysis process this time is ended.

  In step S1610, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the command in the reception buffer is a special symbol reservation number designation command. When the command in the reception buffer is the special symbol reservation number designation command (S1610: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1611. If the command in the reception buffer is not the special symbol holding number designation command (S1610: No), the process proceeds to step 1620.

  In step S1611, the sub CPU 120a performs a special symbol reservation number update process. In the special symbol reservation number update process, the sub CPU 120a analyzes the special symbol reservation number designation command to determine the display number of the reservation display images 37 to be displayed on the image display device 31, and the display number of the reservation display images 37 is determined. Set the corresponding special figure display number specification command in the send buffer.

  The command set in the transmission buffer in the special symbol reservation number update processing is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output processing of step S1800. When the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 receive this command, the image display device 31, the voice output device 32, and the drive device 33a for the effect are connected to the effect related to the appearance or deletion of the hold display image 37 in the image display device 31. , 33b, and the effect lighting device 34.

  In step S1620, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the command in the reception buffer is a start winning award designation command. When the command in the reception buffer is the start winning award designation command (S1620: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1621. If the command in the reception buffer is not the start winning award designation command (S1620: No), the process proceeds to step S1630.

  In step S1621, the sub CPU 120a executes a start winning award designation command storage process. In the start winning award designation command storage processing, the sub CPU 120a selects and selects one of the first effect information storage area and the second effect information storage area of the effect information storage area that corresponds to the starting award designation command in the reception buffer. The storage unit that has not stored data and has the smallest number in the first to fourth storage units of the effect information storage area is the data storage destination, and the start winning award designation command in the reception buffer is stored in the data storage destination storage unit. ..

  FIG. 27C is a diagram showing the effect information storage area. As shown in FIG. 27 (c), the effect information storage area is the 0th storage section corresponding to the variation, the first effect information storage area corresponding to the suspension of the first special symbol, and the suspension of the second special symbol. It has a corresponding second effect information storage area. Each of the first effect information storage area and the second effect information storage area is a first storage section corresponding to the first hold, a second storage section corresponding to the second hold, a third storage section corresponding to the third hold, And a fourth storage unit corresponding to the fourth hold. As shown in FIG. 27D, each storage unit in the effect information storage area can store a start winning award designation command and prefetch hold display change effect scenario data.

  In FIG. 46, after the execution of step S1621, the sub CPU 120a performs a readahead pending display change effect selection process (S1622). In the look-ahead hold display change effect selection process, the sub CPU 120a, regarding the start winning award designation command stored in the effect information storage area in step S1621, the look-ahead hold display change effect a variation of the symbol corresponding to this start award designation command is the final change. When executing the look-ahead hold display change effect, the scenario of the hold display change effect until the final change is determined, and the look-ahead hold display change effect scenario data indicating this scenario is used as effect information. The data is stored in the corresponding storage unit in the storage area. The details of the prefetch hold display change effect selection processing will be described later.

  In step S1630, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether or not the command in the reception buffer is a symbol designating command. When the command in the reception buffer is the symbol designating command (S1630: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1631. If the command in the reception buffer is not the designating command (S1630: No), the process proceeds to step S1640.

  In step S1631, the sub CPU 120a performs effect design determination processing, and ends the command analysis processing of this time after execution of effect design determination processing. In the effect symbol determination process, the sub CPU 120a analyzes the symbol designating command to determine the stop symbol numbers of the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, the right symbol 36R, and the fourth symbol 36Z, and the determined stop symbol number is the sub symbol. Stored in the effect symbol storage area in the RAM 120c, a stop symbol designation command for notifying the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 of the stop symbol number is generated, and the generated stop symbol designation command is set in the transmission buffer. Details of the effect design determination process will be described later.

  The command set in the transmission buffer in the effect design determination processing is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output processing of step S1800. Upon receiving this command, the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 determine the symbol combination at the time of fluctuation stop in the fluctuation.

  In step S1640, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether or not the command in the reception buffer is a fluctuation start command. When the command in the reception buffer is the fluctuation start command (S1640: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1641. If the command in the reception buffer is not the fluctuation start command (S1640: No), the process proceeds to step S1670 (FIG. 48).

  In step S1641, the sub CPU 120a performs a storage area shift process. In the storage area shift processing, if the data is stored in one or more of the first to fourth storage units of the second effect information storage area, the sub CPU 120a stores the second to fourth storage of the second effect information storage area. The data in the set is shifted to the immediately preceding storage unit, and the data in the first storage unit in the second effect information storage area is written in the 0th storage unit. By writing the data in the 0th storage unit, the data (starting winning designation command, pre-reading pending display change effect scenario data) stored in the 0th storage unit until then is erased. When the data is not stored in the second effect information storage area and the data is stored in one or more of the first to fourth storage units of the first effect information storage area, the first effect information storage area The data in the second to fourth storage units is shifted to the previous storage unit, and the data in the first storage unit in the first effect information storage area is written in the zeroth storage unit. By writing the data in the 0th storage unit, the data stored in the 0th storage unit until then is erased.

  Next, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not prefetch hold display change effect scenario data is stored in the effect information storage area (S1642). If the prefetch pending display change effect scenario data is stored (S1642: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1643. When the prefetch pending display change effect scenario data is not stored (S1642: No), the process proceeds to step S1644.

  In step S1643, the sub CPU 120a performs prefetch effect control processing. In the prefetch effect control process, the sub CPU 120a refers to the prefetch pending display change effect scenario data in the effect information storage area, determines whether or not there is a change in the display mode of the pending display image 37 in the variation, and the pending display in the variation. When changing the display mode of the image 37, an effect pattern designation command for instructing a change in the display mode of the hold display image 37 is generated, and the generated effect pattern designation command is set in the transmission buffer.

The command set in the transmission buffer in the prefetch effect control processing is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output processing of step S1800. When the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 receive the effect pattern designation command for instructing the change of the display mode of the hold display image 37, the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 match the execution time (time t _{HH in} FIG. 22) of the prefetch hold display change effect. , The pre-reading pending display change effect is executed by the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, the effect drive devices 33a and 33b, and the effect illumination device 34.

  In step S1645, the sub CPU 120a performs a variation effect pattern determination process. The variation effect pattern determination process is a process of determining a symbol variation effect pattern that is a flow of effects relating to the behavior of the effect symbol 36 and the first movable accessory 330a, 330b in the variation. In the fluctuating effect pattern determination processing, the sub CPU 120a acquires the effect random number value 1 updated in step S1100. The sub CPU 120a refers to the variation effect pattern determination table of the sub ROM 120b, determines the symbol variation effect pattern based on the combination of the variation start command in the reception buffer and the effect random number 1, and determines the determined symbol variation effect pattern. Is stored in the symbol variation effect pattern storage area in the sub RAM 120c. Further, the sub CPU 120a generates an effect pattern designating command of the determined symbol variation effect pattern, and sets the generated effect pattern designating command in the transmission buffer.

  FIG. 49 is a diagram showing a variation effect pattern determination table. In the variation effect pattern determination table, a set of the effect random number 1, the symbol variation effect pattern, and the effect pattern designation command is stored for each corresponding to the variation start command. Among the plurality of symbol variation effect patterns corresponding to each variation start command, some include the re-lottery effect and some do not. Further, some may include the second accessory operation effect and the first accessory operation effect, and some may not.

  For example, the variation start command (16R probability change, variation time T1, SP reach production, pseudo variation 0 times) corresponding to the MODE data “E6H” and DATA data “11H” is selected as the option of the pattern variation production pattern. There are a symbol variation effect pattern 11, a symbol variation effect pattern 12, a symbol variation effect pattern 13, a symbol variation effect pattern 14, a symbol variation effect pattern 15, and the like. The flow of the effect of the symbol variation effect pattern 11 is normal reach effect → SP reach effect → symbol stop (per 16R probability change). The flow of the effect of the symbol variation effect pattern 12 is normal reach effect → second accessory operation operation effect (without accessory tilt) → SP reach effect → symbol stop (per 16R probability change). The flow of the production of the pattern variation production pattern 13 is: normal reach production → second accessory operation production (without accessory tilt) → SP reach production → first accessory operation production (with accessory fall) → symbol stop (per 16R probability change) ). The flow of the production of the pattern variation production pattern 14 is normal reach production → second accessory operation production (without accessory tilt) → SP reach production → re-lottery production (16R probability change notification) → design stop (16R probability change) ing. The flow of the production of the pattern variation production pattern 15 is: normal reach production → second accessory operation production (with accessory tilt) → SP reach production → re-lottery production (16R probability change notification) → design stop (16R probability change) ing.

  In addition, the variation start command (16R probability variation, variation time T2, SP reach production, pseudo variation 1 time) corresponding to the MODE data “E6H” and DATA data “12H” is selected as the option of the pattern variation production pattern. There are a pattern variation effect pattern 21, a symbol variation effect pattern 22, and the like. The flow of the effect of the symbol variation effect pattern 21 is: pseudo continuous effect (1 time) → normal reach effect → SP reach effect → re-lottery effect → symbol stop (per 16R probability change). The flow of the production of the pattern variation production pattern 22 is pseudo continuous production (once) → normal reach production → second accessory operation production (without accessory tilt) → SP reach production → symbol stop (16R probability change). ..

  In addition, the variation start command (16R probability change, variation time T3, SP reach production, pseudo variation 2 times) corresponding to the MODE data “E6H” and DATA data “13H” is selected as the option of the pattern variation production pattern. There are a symbol variation effect pattern 31, a symbol variation effect pattern 32, and the like. The flow of the effect of the symbol variation effect pattern 31 is pseudo continuous effect (twice) → normal reach effect → SP reach effect → re-lottery effect → symbol stop (per 16R probability change). The flow of the production of the pattern variation production pattern 32 is pseudo continuous production (twice) → normal reach production → second accessory operation production (without accessory tilt) → SP reach production → symbol stop (16R probability change). ..

  In addition, the variation start command (16R probability variation, variation time T4, SPSP reach production, pseudo variation 0 times) corresponding to the MODE data “E6H” and DATA data “14H” is selected as the option of the pattern variation production pattern. There are a symbol variation effect pattern 41, a symbol variation effect pattern 42, and the like. The flow of the effect of the symbol variation effect pattern 41 is normal reach effect → SPSP reach effect → symbol stop (per 16R probability change). The flow of the effect of the symbol variation effect pattern 42 is normal reach effect → second accessory operation operation effect (with accessory tilt) → SPSP reach effect → symbol stop (per 16R probability change).

  In addition, as the option of the pattern variation production pattern corresponding to the variation start command (miss, variation time T1, SP reach production, pseudo variation 0 times) in which the MODE data is “E6H” and the DATA data is “01H”, the symbol variation is There are a production pattern 01, a pattern variation production pattern 02, and the like. The flow of the production of the pattern variation production pattern 01 is normal reach production → SP reach production → symbol stop (lost). The flow of the effect of the symbol variation effect pattern 02 is normal reach effect → second accessory operation effect (without accessory tilt) → SP reach effect → symbol stop (lost).

  The command set in the transmission buffer in the variation effect pattern determination processing is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output processing of step S1800. Upon receiving this command, the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140, from the start to the end of the variation time T of the variation, produce a series of effects in accordance with the symbol variation effect pattern of the command, the image display device 31, the voice. The output device 32, the drive devices for production 33a and 33b, and the production lighting device 34 are caused to execute.

  In step S1645 of FIG. 46, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the symbol variation effect pattern determined by the variation effect pattern determination process includes the first accessory operation effect. When the sub CPU 120a includes the first accessory operation effect (S1645: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1646. When the first accessory operation effect is not included (S1645: No), the process proceeds to step S1649.

In step S1646, the sub CPU 120a obtains the remaining time until the start time (time t _{AY1 in} FIG. 10) of the operation reception valid period of the first accessory operation effect within the fluctuation time T of the fluctuation, and resets this time. A value divided by 2 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the clock pulse, is set in the operation reception valid period start timer counter for the first accessory operation effect of the sub RAM 120c. Further, the sub CPU 120a determines the remaining time until the end time (time t _{AY2 in} FIG. 10) of the operation reception valid period of the first accessory operation effect within the change time T of the change, and this time is 2 milliseconds. The divided value is set in the operation reception valid period end timer counter for the first accessory operation effect of the sub RAM 120c. The operation acceptance valid period start timer counter and the operation acceptance valid period end timer counter are counted down each time the timer updating process of step S1500 is executed. The operation reception valid period start timer counter becomes 0 at the start time (time t _{AY1 of} FIG. 10) of the operation reception valid period, and the operation reception valid period end timer counter shows the end time of the operation reception valid period (time of FIG. 10). It becomes 0 at t _AY2 ).

  In step S1647, the sub CPU 120a sets the first operation effect standby flag in the operation effect standby flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c. The first operation effect standby flag is a flag indicating that the first accessory effect operation effect is on standby.

  In step S1648, the sub CPU 120a performs a first accessory operation specific notice effect selection process. In the first accessory operation specific notice effect selection process, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the first accessory operation notice notice effect (FIG. 10C) is required to be executed, and the first accessory operation notice notice effect is executed. In this case, an effect pattern designation command for instructing execution of the first accessory operation specific notice effect is generated, and the generated effect pattern designation command is set in the transmission buffer. Details of the first accessory operation specific notice effect selection process will be described later.

The command set in the transmission buffer in the first accessory operation specific notice effect selection process is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output processing of step S1800. Upon receiving this command, the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 generate the first _accessory operation specific notice effect in accordance with the execution time (time t ′ _{AY1 in} FIG. 10) of the first _accessory operation specific notice effect. The image display device 31, the audio output device 32, the effect drive devices 33a and 33b, and the effect illumination device 34 are executed.

  In step S1649 of FIG. 47, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the symbol variation effect pattern determined in the variation effect pattern determination process includes the second accessory operation effect. When the sub CPU 120a includes the second accessory operation effect (S1649: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1650. When the second accessory operation effect is not included (S1646: No), the process proceeds to step S1653.

In step S1650, the sub CPU 120a obtains the remaining time until the start time (time t _{SY1 in} FIG. 11) of the operation acceptance valid period of the second accessory operation effect within the change time T of the change, and this time is 2 mm. The value divided by the second is set in the operation reception valid period start timer counter for the second accessory operation effect of the sub RAM 120c. Further, the sub CPU 120a obtains the remaining time until the end time (time t _{SY2 in} FIG. 11) of the operation reception valid period of the second accessory operation effect within the variation time T of the variation, and this time is 2 milliseconds. The divided value is set in the operation acceptance valid period end timer counter for the second accessory operation effect of the sub RAM 120c. The operation acceptance valid period start timer counter and the operation acceptance valid period end timer counter are counted down each time the timer updating process of step S1500 is executed. The operation acceptance valid period start timer counter becomes 0 at the start time of the operation acceptance valid period (time t _{SY1 in} FIG. 11), and the operation acceptance valid period end timer counter indicates the end time of the operation acceptance valid period (time in FIG. 11). It becomes 0 at t _SY2 ).

  In step S1651, the sub CPU 120a sets the second operation effect standby flag in the operation effect standby flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c. The second operation effect standby flag is a flag indicating that the second accessory effect operation effect is on standby.

  In step S1652, the sub CPU 120a performs a second accessory operation specific notice effect selection process. In the second accessory operation specific notice effect selection process, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the second accessory operation specific notice effect (FIG. 11 (c)) needs to be executed, and executes the second accessory operation notice notice effect. In this case, an effect pattern designation command for instructing the execution of the second accessory operation specific notice effect is generated, and the generated effect pattern designation command is set in the transmission buffer. Details of the second accessory operation specific notice effect selection process will be described later.

The command set in the transmission buffer in the second accessory operation specific notice effect selection process is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output processing of step S1800. Upon receiving this command, the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 generate the second accessory operation specific announcement effect in accordance with the execution time of the second accessory operation specific announcement effect (time t ′ _{SY1 in} FIG. 11). The image display device 31, the audio output device 32, the effect drive devices 33a and 33b, and the effect illumination device 34 are executed.

  In step S1653, the sub CPU 120a performs a step-up effect selection process. In the step-up effect selection process, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not to execute the step-up effect (FIGS. 13A and 13B) based on the variation start command in the reception buffer, and the step-up effect is selected. When executing, determine a scenario for step-up production up to the final stage, generate a production pattern designation command that instructs execution of production according to this scenario, and store the generated production pattern designation command in the transmission buffer. set. Details of the step-up effect selection process will be described later.

The command set in the transmission buffer in the step-up effect selection process is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output process of step S1800. Upon receiving this command, the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 execute the execution time of one or more step effects in the step-up effect (time t _SUP1 , t _SUP2 , t _SUP3 , t _SUP4 , t _{SPS in} FIG. 13). ), The image display device 31, the audio output device 32, the effect drive devices 33a and 33b, and the effect illumination device 34 are caused to execute each step effect of the step-up effect.

  In step S1654, the sub CPU 120a performs a dialogue operation effect selection process. In the dialogue operation effect selection process, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not to execute the dialogue operation effect (FIGS. 15 (a) and 15 (b)) based on the variation start command in the reception buffer. When executing, the effect pattern designation command for instructing the execution of the dialogue operation effect is generated, and the generated effect pattern designation command is set in the transmission buffer. Details of the dialogue operation effect selection processing will be described later.

The command set in the transmission buffer in the dialogue operation effect selection processing is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output processing in step S1800. Upon receipt of this command, the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 match the dialogue operation effect with the image display device 31, the voice output device 32, and the effect in accordance with the execution time of the dialogue operation effect (time t _{SR0 in} FIG. 15). The drive devices 33a and 33b and the production lighting device 34 are executed. The image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 change the notification mode of the operation result in the dialogue operation effect depending on whether or not the effect button 35 is operated.

  In step S1655, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether or not to execute the dialogue operation effect in determining whether or not to execute the dialogue operation effect. If the sub CPU 120a is to execute the dialogue operation effect (S1655: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1656. If the dialogue operation effect is not to be executed (S1655: No), the process proceeds to step S1657.

  In step S1656, the sub CPU 120a performs a dialogue operation specific notice effect selection process. In the dialogue operation specific notice production selection processing, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not to execute the dialogue operation specific notice production (FIG. 15 (c)), and when the dialogue operation specific notice production is executed, the sub operation specific notice production is performed. An effect pattern designation command for instructing execution of is generated, and the generated effect pattern designation command is set in the transmission buffer. Details of the dialogue operation specific notice effect selection process will be described later.

The command set in the transmission buffer in the dialogue operation specific notice effect selection processing is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output processing in step S1800. Upon receiving this command, the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 display the dialog operation specific announcement effect in accordance with the execution time of the dialogue operation specific announcement effect (time t ′ _{SR1 in} FIG. 15) and the voice. The output device 32, the production drive devices 33a and 33b, and the production illumination device 34 are executed.

  In step S1657, the sub CPU 120a performs a roulette operation effect selection process. In the roulette operation effect selection process, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not to execute the roulette operation effect (FIGS. 16A and 16B) based on the variation start command in the reception buffer, and determines whether or not the roulette operation effect is required. When executing, the effect pattern designation command for instructing the execution of the roulette operation effect is generated, and the generated effect pattern designation command is set in the transmission buffer. The details of the roulette operation effect selection process will be described later.

The command set in the transmission buffer in the roulette operation effect selection processing is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output processing of step S1800. Upon receiving this command, the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 match the roulette operation effect with the execution time (time _{tRL0 in} FIG. 16) of the roulette operation effect, the image display device 31, the sound output device 32, and the effect. The drive devices 33a and 33b and the production lighting device 34 are executed. The image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 change the notification mode of the operation result in the roulette operation effect depending on whether or not the effect button 35 is operated.

  In step S1658, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether or not the roulette operation effect is to be executed in determining whether or not to execute the roulette operation effect. If the roulette operation effect is to be executed (S1658: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1659. When the roulette operation effect is not to be executed (S1658: No), the process proceeds to step S1660.

  In step S1659, the sub CPU 120a performs a roulette operation specific notice effect selection process. In the roulette operation-specific notice effect selection process, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the roulette operation-specific notice effect (FIG. 16C) needs to be executed, and when the roulette operation-specific notice effect is executed, the roulette operation-specific notice effect is executed. An effect pattern designation command for instructing execution of is generated, and the generated effect pattern designation command is set in the transmission buffer. Details of the roulette operation specific notice effect selection process will be described later.

The command set in the transmission buffer in the roulette operation specific notice effect selection processing is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output processing of step S1800. Upon receiving this command, the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 match the roulette operation-specific notice effect to the execution time (time _{t'RL1 in} FIG. 16) and display the roulette operation-specific notice effect on the image display device 31 and the voice. The output device 32, the production drive devices 33a and 33b, and the production illumination device 34 are executed.

  In step S1660, the sub CPU 120a performs a gauge operation effect selection process. In the gauge operation effect selection process, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not to execute the gauge operation effect (FIGS. 17A, 17B, and 17C) based on the variation start command in the reception buffer. When determining and executing the gauge operation effect, an effect pattern designating command for instructing execution of the gauge operation effect is generated, and the generated effect pattern specifying command is set in the transmission buffer. Details of the gauge operation effect selection process will be described later.

The command set in the transmission buffer in the gauge operation effect selection process is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output process of step S1800. When the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 receive this command, the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, and the effect drive device 33a are _synchronized with the execution time of the gauge operation effect (time t _{CG0 in} FIG. 17). , 33b, and the effect lighting device 34 to start the gauge operation effect. The image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 change the notification mode of the operation result in the gauge operation effect depending on whether or not the effect button 35 is operated.

  In step S1661, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether or not to execute the gauge operation effect in the determination of whether or not to execute the gauge operation effect. If the sub CPU 120a is to execute the gauge operation effect (S1661: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1662. If the gauge operation effect is not to be executed (S1661: No), the process proceeds to step S1663.

  In step S1662, the sub CPU 120a performs a gauge operation specific notice effect selection process. In the gauge operation specific notice effect selection process, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not to execute the gauge operation specific notice effect (FIG. 17D), and when executing the gauge operation specific notice effect, the gauge operation specific notice effect. An effect pattern designation command for instructing execution of is generated, and the generated effect pattern designation command is set in the transmission buffer. Details of the gauge operation specific notice effect selection process will be described later.

The command set in the transmission buffer in the gauge operation specific notice effect selection process is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output process of step S1800. When the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 receive this command, the gauge operation-specific notice effect is displayed on the image display device 31 and the sound in accordance with the execution time of the gauge-operation-specific notice effect (time t ′ _{GG3 in} FIG. 17). The output device 32, the production drive devices 33a and 33b, and the production illumination device 34 are executed.

  In step S1660, the sub CPU 120a performs a timing operation effect selection process. In the timing operation effect selection process, the sub CPU 120a determines whether to execute the timing operation effect (FIGS. 18A, 18B, and 18C) based on the variation start command in the reception buffer. When determining and executing the timing operation effect, an effect pattern designating command for instructing execution of the timing operation effect is generated, and the generated effect pattern specifying command is set in the transmission buffer. Details of the timing operation effect selection process will be described later.

The command set in the transmission buffer in the timing operation effect selection process is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output process of step S1800. Upon receiving this command, the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 match the timing operation effect with the image display device 31, the voice output device 32, and the effect in accordance with the execution time of the timing operation effect (time t _{TM0 in} FIG. 18). The drive devices 33a and 33b and the production lighting device 34 are executed. The image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 change the notification mode of the operation result in the timing operation effect depending on whether or not the effect button 35 is operated.

  In step S1664, the sub CPU 120a performs a reach back button operation effect selection process. In the reach back button operation effect selection process, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not to execute the reach back button operation effect (FIG. 19A) based on the variation start command in the reception buffer, and reaches the back button operation effect. When executing, the effect pattern designation command for instructing the execution of the reach back button operation effect is generated, and the generated effect pattern designation command is set in the transmission buffer. Details of the reach back button operation effect selection processing will be described later.

The command set in the transmission buffer in the reach back button operation effect selection processing is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output processing in step S1800. When the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 receive this command, the reach back operation is performed on the condition that the back button operation is successful in accordance with the reach establishment timing (timing t _{NR in} FIG. 19) within the variation time T of the variation. The button operation effect is executed by the image display device 31, the sound output device 32, the effect drive devices 33a and 33b, and the effect illumination device 34.

  In step S1665, the sub CPU 120a performs a step-up back button operation effect selection process. In the step-up back button operation effect selection process, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not to execute the step-up back button operation effect (FIG. 20 (a)) based on the variation start command in the reception buffer. When executing the button operation effect, an effect pattern designation command for instructing execution of the step-up back button operation effect is generated, and the generated effect pattern designation command is set in the transmission buffer. Details of the step-up back button operation effect selection processing will be described later.

The command set in the transmission buffer in the step-up back button operation effect selection process is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output process of step S1800. Image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 receives this command, the step-up back button operation determination timing fluctuation time of the fluctuation T (time _t UR1 in FIG _{20, t UR2, t UR3,} t UR4) Under the condition that the combined back button operation is successful, the step-up back button operation effect is executed by the image display device 31, the sound output device 32, the effect driving devices 33a and 33b, and the effect illumination device 34.

  In step S1670, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether or not the command in the reception buffer is the fluctuation stop command. When the command in the reception buffer is the fluctuation stop command (S1670: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1671. If the command in the reception buffer is not the fluctuation stop command (S1670: No), the process proceeds to step S1680.

  In step S1671, the sub CPU 120a performs an effect symbol stop process. In the effect symbol stop processing, the sub CPU 120a generates a stop designation command for stopping the effect symbol 36, and sets the generated stop designation command in the transmission buffer.

  The stop designation command set in the transmission buffer in the effect design stop processing is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output processing in step S1800. When the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 receive this command, the image display device 31, the sound output device 32, the effect drive devices 33a and 33b, and the effect illumination device 34 provide effects related to the stop of the effect pattern 36. To run.

  In step S1680, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether or not the command in the reception buffer is a game state designation command. When the command in the reception buffer is the game state designation command (S1680: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1681. If the command in the reception buffer is not the game state designation command (S1680: No), the process proceeds to step S1690.

  In step S1681, the sub CPU 120a performs a game state setting process. In the game state setting process, the sub CPU 120a analyzes the game state designation command in the reception buffer to obtain the current game state, and stores the game state information indicating the obtained game state in the game state storage area of the sub RAM 120c. ..

  In step S1690, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the command in the reception buffer is the opening designation command. If the command in the reception buffer is the opening designation command (S1690: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1691. If the command in the reception buffer is not the opening designation command (S1690: No), the process proceeds to step S1692.

  In step S1691, the sub CPU 120a performs a special game effect selection process. In the special game effect selection processing, the sub CPU 120a determines an opening effect pattern based on the opening designation command in the reception buffer, and stores information on the determined opening effect pattern in the effect pattern storage area of the sub RAM 120c. Further, when the opening designation command is the 8R probability change or the 8R normal hit, the sub CPU 120a executes the promotion effect in the fourth round, and stores it in the effect information storage area for each round of the fourth round of the sub RAM 120c. The promotion effect execution data indicating the contents of the promotion effect is stored. Details of the special game effect selection processing will be described later.

  The command set in the transmission buffer in the special game effect selection processing is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output processing of step S1800. Upon receiving this command, the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 cause the image display device 31, the sound output device 32, the drive devices 33a and 33b for effect, and the effect illumination device 34 to execute the opening effect of the special game. ..

  In step S1692, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the command in the reception buffer is a round start command. When the command in the reception buffer is the round start command (S1692: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1693. If the command in the reception buffer is not the round start command (S1692: No), the process proceeds to step S1694.

  In Step S1693, the sub CPU 120a performs a round effect control process. In the round effect control process, the sub CPU 120a analyzes the round start command in the reception buffer and determines whether or not this round is the execution round of promotion effect (4th round per 8R probability variation or 8R normal change). judge. Based on this determination result, the sub CPU 120a determines the effect pattern of this round, stores the information of the determined effect pattern in the effect pattern storage area of the sub RAM 120c, and generates the effect pattern designation command for this effect pattern. , The generated effect pattern designation command is set in the transmission buffer. Details of the round effect control processing will be described later.

  The command set in the transmission buffer in the round effect control processing is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output processing of step S1800. Upon receiving this command, the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 cause the image display device 31, the sound output device 32, the effect drive devices 33a and 33b, and the effect illumination device 34 to execute the special game round effect. ..

  In step S16934, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the command in the reception buffer is an ending designation command. If the command in the reception buffer is the ending designation command (S1694: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1695. When the command in the reception buffer is not the ending designation command (S1694: No), the command analysis process this time is ended.

  In step S1695, the sub CPU 120a performs a special game end effect control process. In the special game end effect control process, the sub CPU 120a analyzes the ending designation command in the reception buffer to determine the ending effect pattern, and stores the information of the determined effect pattern in the effect pattern storage area of the sub RAM 120c. Further, the sub CPU 120a generates an effect pattern designating command for the determined effect pattern and sets the effect pattern designating command in the transmission buffer. In addition, the sub CPU 120a clears any flags that have been set during the special game.

  The command set in the transmission buffer in the special game end effect control processing is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output processing of step S1800. Upon receiving this command, the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 cause the image display device 31, the sound output device 32, the effect drive devices 33a and 33b, and the effect illumination device 34 to execute the ending effect of the special game. ..

  FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing details of the prefetching pending display change effect selection processing (step S1622 in FIG. 46). In FIG. 50, the sub CPU 120a sets the hold corresponding to the storage unit in the effect information storage area storing the start winning designation command in the start winning designation command storage process as the prefetch determination target suspension, and the variation of the prefetch determination target suspension develops. It is determined whether or not the change has an effect (SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect) (S1622-1). If the change has a development effect (S1622-1: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1622-2. When it is not a change having a development effect (S1622-1: No), the prefetch hold display change effect selection process of this time is ended.

  In step S1622-2, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not there is a change having a development effect in the hold in which the change order is prior to the look-ahead determination target hold. When there is no change having a development effect (S1622-2: No), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1622-3. When there is a change having a development effect (S1622-2: Yes), the prefetching pending display change effect selection process of this time is ended.

  In Step S1622-3, the sub CPU 120a performs a readahead pending display change effect execution determination process. In the prefetch pending display change effect execution determination process, the sub CPU 120a acquires the effect random number value 2 updated in step S1100. The sub CPU 120a refers to the look-ahead hold display change effect execution determination table of the sub-ROM 120b, and based on the combination of the pre-determination result (big hit or loss) and the random number value for effect 2 indicated by the start winning award designation command of the look-ahead determination target hold. , It is determined whether or not the read-ahead hold display change effect needs to be executed.

  FIG. 51A is a diagram showing a look-ahead pending display change effect execution determination table. In the look-ahead hold display change effect execution determination table, a set of data indicating the effect random number 2 and the necessity of execution (“execute” and “do not execute”) is referred to when the pre-determination result is a big hit. It is memorized by dividing into what is referred to when it is lost. Specifically, for the jackpot, 55 (0 to 54) random number values for production 2 are associated with data indicating that the prefetch pending display change production is executed, and 45 (55 to 99). The random number value 2 for effect is associated with the data indicating that the prefetch pending display change effect is not executed. Regarding the loss, 45 (0 to 44) random number values for effect 2 are associated with data indicating that the prefetch pending display change effect is executed, and 55 (45 to 99) random number values for effect 2 Is associated with data indicating that the prefetch pending display change effect is not executed.

  In Step S1622-4, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether the determination result of the read-ahead hold display change effect execution determination process is “execute” or “not execute”. When the determination result is “execute” (S1622-4: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1622-5. When the determination result is “not to execute” (S1622-4: No), the prefetching hold display change effect selection process of this time is ended.

  In Step S1622-5, the sub CPU 120a performs a prefetch reservation display change final stage determination process. In the prefetch reservation display change final stage determination process, the sub CPU 120a acquires the effect random number 3 updated in step S1100. The sub CPU 120a refers to the final stage hold display mode determination table of the sub ROM 120b, and based on the combination of the preliminary determination result (big hit or loss) and the random number value for presentation 3 indicated by the start winning award designation command of the prefetch determination target hold, The display mode of the hold display image 37 at the final stage in the look-ahead hold display change effect is determined.

  FIG. 51B is a diagram showing a final stage hold display mode determination table. In the final stage reserved display mode determination table, when the pre-judgment result is a jackpot, the data set indicating the random number value for production 3 and the final stage reserved display mode (“blue”, “green”, and “red”) It is memorized by dividing into what is referred to when it is lost and what is referred when it is lost. Specifically, for the jackpot, 10 (0 to 9) random numbers 3 for effect are associated with data indicating the reserved display mode of "blue", and 30 (10 to 39) effects. The random number value 3 is associated with the data indicating the reserved display mode of "green", and the 60 (40 to 99) random number values for presentation 3 are associated with the data indicating the reserved display mode of "red". There is. Regarding the loss, 60 (0 to 59) effect random number values 3 are associated with data indicating the reserved display mode of "blue", and 30 (60 to 89) effect random number values 3 are ". It is associated with data indicating the reserved display mode of "green", and 10 (90 to 99) random numbers 3 for effect are correlated with data indicating the reserved display mode of "red".

  In Step S1622-6, the sub CPU 120a performs a readahead pending display change effect scenario determination process. In the prefetching pending display change effect scenario determination process, the sub CPU 120a acquires the effect random number value 4 updated in step S1100. The sub CPU 120a refers to the look-ahead hold display change effect scenario determination table of the sub ROM 120b, and refers to the pre-judgment target pre-judgment start winning award designation command indicating the pre-judgment result (big hit or loss), the final stage hold display mode, the number of hold, Based on the combination of the random number value for production 4, the look-ahead hold display change production scenario is determined.

  There are two types of look-ahead pending display change effect scenario determination tables, one that is referred to when the preliminary determination result is a big hit and one that is referred to in the case of a loss. FIG. 52 is a diagram showing a look-ahead hold display change effect scenario determination table to be referred to when the preliminary determination result is a big hit. FIG. 53 is a diagram showing a look-ahead pending display change effect scenario determination table to be referred to when the preliminary determination result indicates a loss.

  In the look-ahead hold display change effect scenario determination table, a set of the effect random number 4 and the look-ahead hold display change effect scenario data corresponds to the combination of the hold display mode and the hold number at the final stage of the look-ahead hold display change effect. Remembered in. In the jackpot pre-reading pending display change effect scenario determination table (FIG. 52) and the lost pre-reading pending display change effect scenario determination table (FIG. 53), an effect of the pending display change effect called "falling down" to the effect scenarios HR39 and HR49. Whether or not the assigned random number value 4 is assigned is different.

  More specifically, in this table, the option corresponding to the combination of blue and the number of holdings 1 is the holding display change effect scenario HB11. The hold display change effect scenario HB11 is a scenario in which the hold display image 37 is made blue by the final change. 100 (0 to 99) random numbers 4 for effect are associated with the pending display change effect scenario HB11. The options corresponding to the combination of blue and the number of holdings 2 include holding display change effect scenarios HB21 and HB22. The pending display change effect scenarios HB21 and HB22 are scenarios in which the pending display image 37 turns blue at different times. 70 (0 to 69) random numbers 4 for effect are associated with the pending display change effect scenario HB21, and 30 (70 to 99) random number values 4 for effect are associated with the pending display change effect scenario HB22. ing.

  The options corresponding to the combination of blue and the number of holdings 3 include holding display change effect scenarios HB31, HB32, and HB33. The pending display change effect scenarios HB31, HB32, and HB33 are scenarios in which the pending display image 37 turns blue at different times. 20 to 50 production random number values 4 are associated with the pending display change production scenarios HB31, HB32, and HB33, respectively. Options corresponding to the combination of blue and the number of holdings 4 include holding display change effect scenarios HB41, HB42, HB43, and HB44. The pending display change effect scenarios HB41, HB42, HB43, and HB44 are scenarios in which the pending display image 37 turns blue at different times. The pending display change effect scenarios HB41, HB42, HB43, and HB44 are associated with 10 to 40 effect random number values 4, respectively.

  An option corresponding to the combination of green and the number of reservations 1 is a hold display change effect scenario HG11. The hold display change effect scenario HG11 is a scenario in which the hold display image 37 is made green by the final change. 100 (0 to 99) random numbers 4 for effect are associated with the pending display change effect scenario HG11. The options corresponding to the combination of green and the number of holdings 2 include holding display change effect scenarios HG21 and HG22. The pending display change effect scenarios HG21 and HG22 are scenarios in which the time when the pending display image 37 becomes green and the presence or absence of a change to blue before reaching that time are different. 70 (0 to 69) random numbers 4 for effect are associated with the pending display change effect scenario HG21, and 30 (70 to 99) random number values for effect 4 are associated with the pending display change effect scenario HG22. ing.

  The options corresponding to the combination of green and the number of reservations 3 include reservation display change effect scenarios HG31 to HG38. The pending display change effect scenarios HG31 to HG38 are scenarios in which the time when the pending display image 37 becomes green and the presence or absence of a change to blue before reaching that time are different. The pending display change effect scenarios HG31 to HG38 are associated with 5 to 20 effect random numbers 4, respectively. The options corresponding to the combination of green and the number of reservations 4 include reservation display change effect scenarios HG41 to HG48. The pending display change effect scenarios HG41 to HG48 are scenarios in which the time when the pending display image 37 becomes green and the presence or absence of a change to blue before reaching that time are different. The pending display change effect scenarios HG41 to HG48 are associated with 5 to 20 effect random numbers 4, respectively.

  An option corresponding to the combination of red and the number of holdings 1 is a holding display change effect scenario HR11. The hold display change effect scenario HR11 is a scenario in which the hold display image 37 is made red by the final change. 100 (0 to 99) random numbers 4 for effect are associated with the pending display change effect scenario HR11. The options corresponding to the combination of red and the number of hold 2 are hold display change effect scenarios HR21, HR22, HR23, and HR24. The pending display change effect scenarios HR21, HR22, HR23, and HR24 are scenarios in which the time at which the pending display image 37 becomes red and the presence or absence of a change to blue or green before reaching that time are different. 10 to 40 random numbers 4 for effect are respectively associated with the pending display change effect scenarios HR21, HR22, HR23, and HR24.

  The options corresponding to the combination of red and the number of holdings 3 include holding display change effect scenarios HR31 to HR39. The pending display change effect scenarios HR31 to HR39 are scenarios in which the time when the pending display image 37 becomes red and the presence or absence of a change to blue and green before reaching that time are different. Here, the hold display change effect scenarios HR31 to HR38 are “upright” scenarios in which the change of the subsequent display changes to a display state of higher reliability than that of the previous change, such as blue → green → red. On the other hand, the hold display change effect scenario HR39 is a "falling" scenario in which the change of the subsequent display changes to the hold display mode of which reliability is lower than that of the previous change, such as green → red → green. In the jackpot table (FIG. 52), 5 to 20 random numbers 4 for effect are associated with the pending display change effect scenarios HR31 to HR38, and 1 (99) effect to the pending display change effect scenario HR39. Random number value 4 is associated. On the other hand, in the loss table (FIG. 53), 5 to 20 random numbers 4 for effect are associated with the pending display change effect scenarios HR31 to HR38. Further, in the losing table, even one random number 4 for effect is not associated with the pending display change effect scenario HR39.

  The options corresponding to the combination of red and the number of holdings 4 include holding display change effect scenarios HR41 to HR49. The pending display change effect scenarios HR41 to HR49 are scenarios in which the time when the pending display image 37 becomes red and the presence or absence of a change to blue and green before reaching that time are different. Of the pending display change effect scenarios HR41 to HR49, the pending display change effect scenarios HR41 to 48 are "rise" scenarios, and the pending display change effect scenario HR49 is a "fall" scenario. In the jackpot table (FIG. 52), 5 to 20 random numbers 4 for effect are associated with the pending display change effect scenarios HR41 to HR48, and 1 (99) effect to the pending display change effect scenario HR49. Random number value 4 is associated. On the other hand, in the loss table (FIG. 53), 5 to 20 effect random number values 4 are associated with the pending display change effect scenarios HR41 to HR48. Further, in the losing table, even one random number 4 for effect is not associated with the pending display change effect scenario HR49.

  In this way, in the gaming machine 1, for the combination of red and the number of holdings 3 and the combination of red and the number of holdings 4, it is possible to select the "falling" pending display change effect scenarios HR39 and HR49 only from the jackpot table. ing. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1, the pre-reading pending display change effect of "falling down" is a final fluctuation jackpot finalized effect (an effect of notifying that the final fluctuation will result in a jackpot before stopping the symbol of the final fluctuation).

  In step S1622-7 of FIG. 50, the sub CPU 120a stores the scenario data of the prefetch pending display change effect scenario determined in the prefetch pending display change effect scenario determination processing in the storage unit in the effect information storage area.

  Here, in the look-ahead hold display change effect selection process, when there is a development effect in the look-ahead determination target hold and there is no development effect in the hold that is in the previous change order (S1622-1: Yes → S1622-2: No). The read-ahead hold display change effect execution determination processing is performed. According to the flow of such processing, the effect control board 120 causes the development effect to be executed as the effect during the variable display of the final change of the look-ahead hold display change effect when the look-ahead hold display change effect is executed, and the look-ahead hold effect. The development effect is restricted from being executed as an effect during the change display before the final change of the display change effect.

  FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the details of the effect symbol determination processing (step S1631 in FIG. 46). In FIG. 54, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the variation stops at a jackpot (S1631-1: Yes). Sub CPU120a progresses to step S1631-2, when the said fluctuation | variation stops with a jackpot pattern (S1631-1: Yes). If the variation does not stop with a jackpot (S1631-1: No), the process proceeds to step S1631-3.

  In step S1631-2, the sub CPU 120a selects a symbol combination of the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, the right symbol 36R, and the fourth symbol 36Z from among those corresponding to the type of the winning jackpot, and in the selected symbol combination. The four stop symbol numbers of the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, the right symbol 36R, and the fourth symbol 36Z are determined.

  In step S1631-3, the sub CPU 120a selects the symbol combination of the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, the right symbol 36R, and the fourth symbol 36Z from among those corresponding to the loss, and the left symbol 36L in the selected symbol combination, The four stop symbol numbers of the middle symbol 36C, the right symbol 36R, and the fourth symbol 36Z are determined.

  In step S1631-4, the sub CPU 120a stores the determined four stop symbol numbers in the effect symbol storage area of the sub RAM 120c.

  In step S1631-5, the sub CPU 120a generates a stop symbol designation command for notifying the determined four stop symbol numbers, and sets the generated stop symbol designation command in the transmission buffer.

  FIG. 55 is a flow chart showing details of the first accessory operation specific notice effect selection process (step S1648 in FIG. 46). In FIG. 55, the sub CPU 120a performs a first accessory operation specific notice effect execution determination process (S1648-1). In the first accessory operation specific notice effect execution determination process, the sub CPU 120a acquires the effect random number 5 updated in step S1100. The sub CPU 120a refers to the first accessory operation specific notice effect execution determination table of the sub ROM 120b, and based on the jackpot determination result (big hit or loss) indicated by the variation start command in the reception buffer, and the random number value for effect 5, Whether or not it is necessary to execute the first accessory operation specific notice effect is determined.

  FIG. 56 is a diagram showing a first accessory operation specific notice effect execution determination table. In the first accessory operation specific notice effect execution determination table, when the jackpot determination result is a jackpot, a combination of data indicating the effect random number value 5 and the necessity of execution (“execute” and “do not execute”) It is stored separately for reference and for reference in case of loss. Specifically, for the jackpot, data indicating that 20 (0 to 19) random number values for production 5 execute the first accessory operation specific notice production, and 80 (20 to 99) for production. The random number value 5 is associated with data indicating that the first accessory operation specific notice effect is not executed. Regarding the loss, 100 (0 to 99) random number values for effect 5 are associated with data indicating that the first accessory operation specific notice effect is not executed. Regarding the loss, no one of the effect random number 5 is associated with the data indicating that the first accessory operation specific notice effect is executed. With such a configuration of the table, the effect control board 120 performs the first accessory operation when performing the first accessory operation effect with an accessory drop, which is an effect that is difficult to be selected when the jackpot determination result is not a big hit. When it is possible to execute the specific notice production, and when executing the first accessory operation production without the fall of the accessory, which is the production that is easily selected when the jackpot determination result is not a big hit, the first accessory operation specific notice production Regulate the execution of.

  In step S1648-2, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether the determination result of the first accessory operation specific notice effect execution determination process is “execute” or “not execute”. If the determination result is “execute” (S1648-2: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1648-3. When the determination result is “not to execute” (S1648-2: No), the current first accessory operation specific notice effect selection process ends.

  In step S1648-3, the sub CPU 120a generates an effect pattern designating command for instructing execution of the first character object operation specific notice effect, sets the generated effect pattern specifying command in the transmission buffer, and sets the first character object this time. The operation-specific notice production selection process ends.

  FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing details of the second accessory operation specific notice effect selection process (step S1652 in FIG. 47). In FIG. 57, the sub CPU 120a performs a second accessory operation specific notice effect execution determination process (S1652-1). In the second accessory operation specific notice effect execution determination processing, the sub CPU 120a acquires the effect random number value 6 updated in step S1100. The sub CPU 120a refers to the second accessory operation specific notice effect execution determination table of the sub ROM 120b, and refers to the jackpot determination result (big hit or loss) indicated by the variation start command in the reception buffer, SP reach effect or SPSP reach effect in the variation. It is determined whether or not the second accessory operation specific advance notice effect is to be executed based on a combination of whether or not the development has been made and the combination of the random number value 6 for effect.

  FIG. 58 is a diagram showing a second accessory operation specific notice effect execution determination table. In the second accessory operation specific notice effect execution determination table, a set of data indicating the effect random number 6 and the necessity of execution (“execute” and “do not execute”) indicates the jackpot determination result and the presence or absence of development. It is stored separately for each combination and corresponding one. Specifically, for combinations in which the jackpot determination result is jackpot and development, 75 (0 to 74) random number values 6 for effect, and data indicating that the second accessory operation specific notice effect is executed, Twenty-five (75 to 99) effect random number values 6 are respectively associated with data indicating that the second accessory operation specific notice effect is not executed. For a combination in which the jackpot determination result is a jackpot and there is no development, 100 (0 to 99) random numbers 6 for effect are associated with data indicating that the second accessory operation specific notice effect is not executed. Regarding this combination, no one of the effect random number 6 is associated with the data indicating that the second accessory operation specific notice effect is executed.

  For combinations where the jackpot determination result is lost and has been developed, 80 pieces (0 to 79) of the random number value for production 6 indicating that the second accessory operation specific notice production is executed and 20 pieces (80 to 99) The random number 6 for effect of () is associated with the data indicating that the second accessory operation specific notice effect is not executed. For a combination in which the jackpot determination result is lost and has not been developed, 100 (0 to 99) random number values 6 for production are associated with data indicating that the second accessory operation specific notice production is not executed. Regarding this combination, no one of the effect random number 6 is associated with the data indicating that the second accessory operation specific notice effect is executed.

  With such a configuration of the table, the effect control board 120 performs the second accessory operation when performing the second accessory operation effect with the accessory tilt, which is an effect that is difficult to be selected when the jackpot determination result is not a big hit. When it is possible to execute the specific announcement effect, and when the second accessory operation effect without accessory tilt, which is an effect that is easily selected when the jackpot determination result is not a big hit, is executed, the second accessory operation specific announcement effect. Regulate the execution of.

  In Step S1652-2, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether the determination result of the second accessory operation specific notice effect execution determination process is “execute” or “not execute”. When the determination result is “execute” (S1652-2: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1652-3. When the determination result is “not to execute” (S1652-2: No), the second second accessory operation specific notice effect selection process of this time is ended.

  In step S1652-3, the sub CPU 120a generates an effect pattern designating command for instructing execution of the second accessory operation specific advance notice effect, sets the generated effect pattern specifying command in the transmission buffer, and sets the second accessory effect this time. The operation-specific notice production selection process ends.

  FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the details of the step-up effect selection process (step S1653 in FIG. 47). In FIG. 59, the sub CPU 120a performs a step-up effect execution determination process (S1653-1). In the step-up effect execution determination process, the sub CPU 120a acquires the effect random number 7 updated in step S1100. The sub CPU 120a refers to the step-up effect execution determination table of the sub-ROM 120b, and based on the combination of the jackpot determination result (big hit or loss) indicated by the variation start command in the reception buffer and the effect random number 7, the step-up effect. The necessity of execution of is determined.

  FIG. 60A is a diagram showing a step-up effect execution determination table. In the step-up effect execution determination table, the set of the random number 7 for effect and the necessity of execution (“execute” and “do not execute”) is referred to when the jackpot determination result is a jackpot. It is memorized by dividing into what is referred to when. Specifically, for the jackpot, 55 (0 to 54) random number values for production 7 are associated with data indicating that step-up production is executed, and 45 (55 to 99) for production. The random number value 7 is associated with data indicating that the step-up effect is not executed. Regarding the loss, 45 (0 to 44) random number values for effect 7 are associated with data indicating that step-up effect is executed, and 55 (45 to 99) random number values for effect 7 are set as steps. It is associated with data indicating that the up effect is not executed.

  In step S1653-2, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether the determination result of the step-up effect execution determination process is “execute” or “not execute”. When the determination result is “execute” (S1653-2: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1653-3. When the determination result is “not to execute” (S1653-2: No), the step-up effect selection process of this time is ended.

  In Step S1653-3, the sub CPU 120a performs a step-up effect final stage determination process. In the step-up effect final stage determination processing, the sub CPU 120a acquires the effect random number 8 updated in step S1100. The sub CPU 120a refers to the step-up effect final stage determination table of the sub-ROM 120b, and based on the combination of the jackpot determination result (big hit or loss) and the random number value 8 for effect indicated by the variation start command in the reception buffer, the step-up is performed. Determine the final stage of production.

  FIG. 60 (b) is a diagram showing a step-up effect final stage determination table. In the step-up production final stage determination table, a set of random numbers for production 8 and a data set indicating the final stage are stored separately for those referred to when the jackpot determination result is a big hit and those referred to when the jackpot is lost. There is. Specifically, with regard to the big hit, the data indicating that the three (0 to 2) random numbers 8 for production are "normal stage 1 (blue)" and the five random numbers 8 for production (3 to 7) Data indicating "normal stage 2 (blue)", 7 (8 to 14) random number values for production 8 indicating "normal stage 2 (green)", and 11 (15 to 25) production Data indicating that the random number value 8 is "normal stage 3 (blue)", data indicating that 12 (26 to 37) random number values 8 for production are "normal stage 3 (green)", and 13 (38 to 51) ) Production random number value 8 indicates "normal stage 3 (red)", 14 pieces (52 to 63) production random number value 8 indicates "normal stage 4 (blue)", and 16 pieces (64-80) random number value 8 for production shows "normal stage 4 (green)", and 18 (81-98) random number values 8 for production are "normal stage 4 (red)". And data indicating a data one (99) effect-use random number 8 indicates a "special step", are respectively associated.

  Regarding the loss, data indicating that 18 (0 to 17) random number values 8 for production are "normal stage 1 (blue)" and 16 (18 to 33) random number values 8 for production are "normal stage 2 ( “Blue)”, 14 pieces (34 to 47) of the random number 8 for performance indicate “normal stage 2 (green)”, and 13 (48 to 60) of the random number 8 for performance are “ Data indicating "normal stage 3 (blue)", data indicating that 12 (61 to 72) random number values 8 for production are "normal stage 3 (green)", and 11 (73 to 83) random numbers for production Data indicating that the numerical value 8 is "normal stage 3 (red)", data indicating that 7 random numbers (84 to 90) for production 8 are "normal stage 4 (blue)", and 5 (91 to 95) The random number value for production 8 indicates "normal stage 4 (green)", and the four random number values for production (96 to 99) indicate "normal stage 4 (red)". And over data are associated respectively. As for the loss, no one random number 8 for effect is associated with the data indicating the “special stage”.

  In Step S1653-4, the sub CPU 120a performs a step-up effect scenario determination process. In the step-up effect scenario determination process, the sub CPU 120a acquires the effect random number 9 updated in step S1100. The sub CPU 120a refers to the step-up effect scenario determination table of the sub-ROM 120b, and determines the step-up effect scenario based on the combination of the final stage and the effect random number 9 determined in the previous step.

  FIG. 61 is a diagram showing a step-up effect scenario determination table. In the step-up effect scenario determination table, a set of effect random number 9 and step-up effect scenario data is stored for each one corresponding to the final stage of the step-up effect.

  More specifically, in this table, the option corresponding to the normal stage 1 (blue) includes the step-up effect scenario GS11. The step-up effect scenario GS11 is a scenario only for step effects in the normal stage 1 (blue). 100 (0 to 99) random numbers for production 9 are associated with the step-up production scenario GS11.

  The option corresponding to the normal stage 2 (blue) includes a step-up effect scenario GS21. The step-up effect scenario GS21 is a scenario that develops from the step effect of the normal stage 1 (blue) to the step effect of the normal stage 2 (blue). 100 (0 to 99) random numbers for production 9 are associated with the step-up production scenario GS21.

  An option corresponding to the normal stage 2 (green) is a step-up effect scenario GS22. The step-up effect scenario GS22 is a scenario that develops from the step effect of the normal stage 1 (blue) to the step effect of the normal stage 2 (green). 100 (0 to 99) random numbers 9 for effect are associated with the step-up effect scenario GS22.

  The options corresponding to the normal stage 3 (blue) include step-up effect scenarios GS31 and GS32. The step-up effect scenario GS31 is a scenario in which the step effect of the normal stage 1 (blue) → the step effect of the normal stage 2 (blue) → the step effect of the normal stage 3 (blue) is developed. The step-up effect scenario GS32 is a scenario that develops into a step effect of the normal stage 1 (blue) → step skipping → a step effect of the normal stage 3 (blue). 90 (0 to 89) random numbers 9 for effect are associated with the step-up effect scenario GS31, and 10 (90 to 99) random number values 9 for effect are associated with the step-up effect scenario GS32. ..

  The options corresponding to the normal stage 3 (green) include step-up effect scenarios GS33, GS34, and GS35. The step-up effect scenarios GS33, GS34, and GS35 are scenarios in which the frame color of the photo image in the normal stages 1 and 2 before reaching the normal stage 3 (green) and the presence / absence of skipped step effects in the middle are different. The step-up effect scenarios GS33, GS34, and GS35 are associated with 10 to 45 effect random number values 9, respectively.

  The options corresponding to the normal stage 3 (red) include step-up effect scenarios GS36, GS37, GS38, and GS39. The step-up effect scenarios GS36, GS37, GS38, and GS39 are scenarios in which the frame colors of the photo images in the normal stages 1 and 2 before reaching the normal stage 3 (red) and the presence / absence of skipped step effects in the middle are different. 10 to 30 random number values 9 for effect are respectively associated with the step-up effect scenarios GS36, GS37, GS38, and GS39.

  The options corresponding to the normal stage 4 (blue) include step-up effect scenarios GS41, GS42, and GS43. The step-up effect scenarios GS41, GS42, and GS43 are different scenarios in which skipping of step effect is different in the normal stages 1, 2, and 3 before reaching the normal stage 4 (blue). Five to 90 production random number values 9 are associated with the step-up production scenarios GS41, GS42, and GS43, respectively.

  The options corresponding to the normal stage 4 (green) include step-up effect scenarios GS51 to GS60. The step-up effect scenarios GS51 to GS60 are scenarios in which the frame color of the photo image in the normal stages 1, 2, and 3 before reaching the normal stage 4 (green) and the presence / absence of skipped step effects in the middle are different. The step-up production scenarios GS51 to GS60 are associated with 5 to 20 production random number values 9, respectively.

  The options corresponding to the normal stage 4 (red) include step-up effect scenarios GS61 to GS70. The step-up effect scenarios GS61 to GS70 are scenarios in which the frame color of the photo image in the normal stages 1, 2, and 3 before reaching the normal stage 4 (red) and the presence / absence of skipped step effects in the middle are different. The step-up production scenarios GS61 to GS70 are associated with 5 to 20 production random number values 9, respectively.

  Options corresponding to the special stage include step-up effect scenarios GS81 to GS90. The step-up effect scenarios GS81 to GS90 are scenarios in which the frame colors of the photo images in the normal stages 1, 2, 3, and 4 before reaching the special stage and the presence or absence of skipped step effects in the middle are different. The step-up production scenarios GS81 to GS90 are associated with 5 to 20 production random number values 9, respectively.

  In step S1653-5 of FIG. 59, the sub CPU 120a sets the effect pattern designation command of the step-up effect scenario determined in the step-up effect scenario determination processing in the transmission buffer.

  FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the details of the dialogue operation effect selection processing (step S1654 in FIG. 47). In FIG. 62, the sub CPU 120a performs a dialogue operation effect execution determination process (S1654-1). In the dialogue operation effect execution determination process, the sub CPU 120a acquires the effect random number value 10 updated in step S1100. The sub CPU 120a refers to the dialogue operation effect execution determination table of the sub ROM 120b, and based on the combination of the jackpot determination result (big hit or loss) indicated by the fluctuation start command in the reception buffer and the effect random number value 10, the dialogue operation effect. The necessity of execution of is determined.

  FIG. 63A is a diagram showing a dialogue operation effect execution determination table. In the dialogue operation effect execution determination table, a set of data indicating the effect random number value 10 and the necessity of execution (“execute” and “do not execute”) is referred to when the jackpot determination result is a jackpot. It is memorized by dividing into what is referred to when. Specifically, for the jackpot, 45 (0 to 44) random number values 10 for effect are associated with data indicating that the dialogue operation effect is executed, and 55 (45 to 99) effect numbers are used. The random number value 10 is associated with data indicating that the dialogue operation effect is not executed. Regarding the loss, 55 (0 to 54) random number values 10 for production are associated with data indicating that the dialogue operation effect is executed, and 45 (55 to 99) random number values 10 for production are used. It is associated with data indicating that the operation effect is not executed.

  In step S1654-2, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether the determination result of the dialogue operation effect execution determination process is “execute” or “not execute”. When the determination result is “execute” (S1654-2: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1654-3. When the determination result is “not executed” (S1654-2: No), the dialogue operation effect selection process of this time is ended.

  In step S1654-3, the sub CPU 120a performs a progress mode determination process. The progress mode determination process is a process of determining the progress pattern of the dialogue operation effect. The progress pattern shows a notification mode of an operation result that progresses in response to the operation of the effect button 35 in the dialogue operation effect. In the progress mode determination process, the sub CPU 120a acquires the effect random number 11 updated in step S1100. The sub CPU 120a refers to the dialogue operation effect progress mode determination table of the sub ROM 120b, and based on the combination of the jackpot determination result (big hit or miss) and the random number value 11 for effect, which are indicated by the variation start command in the reception buffer, the dialogue effect. Determine the evolution pattern of.

  FIG. 63A is a diagram showing a dialogue operation effect development mode determination table. In the dialogue operation production progress mode determination table, a set of the random number value for production 11 and the development pattern is separately stored, that is, one referred to when the jackpot determination result is a big hit and one referred to when the jackpot is lost.

  Specifically, in the options corresponding to the jackpots in this table, the progress patterns SP11 to SR15 (the character that speaks the character is the character A) and the progress patterns SR21 to SR25 (the character who speaks the character is the character B). Something), progress patterns SR31 to SR35 (the character who speaks the character is the character C), progress patterns SR41 to SR45 (the character who speaks the character is the character D), and progress pattern SR50 (the premium character appears. ).

  Regarding the big hit, five random numbers 11 for effect are associated with the development patterns SR11 to SR15, SR21 to SR25, and SR31 to SR35. 4-5 random numbers 11 for production are associated with the development patterns SR41-45. One piece of production random number value 11 is associated with the progress pattern SR50.

  Regarding the loss, 4 to 5 staging random number values 11 are associated with the development patterns SR11 to SR15, SR21 to SR25, and SR31 to SR35. Seven effect random numbers 11 are associated with the development patterns SR41 to SR45. No one random number value 11 for effect is associated with the development pattern SR50.

  Here, in this table, the difference between the selection rate in the case of a big hit and the selection rate in the case of a loss in the development patterns SR11 to SR15, SR21 to SR25, SR31 to SR35 is 1% at the maximum, whereas the development patterns SR41 to The maximum difference between the selection rate in the case of a big hit and the selection rate in the case of loss in SR45 is 3%. Progress patterns SR11 to SR15 (character A speaks lines), SR21 to SR25 (character B speaks lines), and SR31 to SR35 (character C speaks lines) and progress patterns SR41 to SR45. Comparing with (character D speaking a line), it is difficult to select the progress patterns SR11 to SR15, SR21 to SR25, and SR31 to SR35 when the jackpot determination result is not a jackpot, and the progress patterns SR41 to SR45. Is easily selected when the jackpot determination result is not a jackpot.

In step S1654-4, the sub CPU 120a obtains the remaining time until the start time (time t _{SR1 in} FIG. 15) of the operation acceptance valid period of the dialogue operation effect within the variation time T of the variation, and this time is 2 milliseconds. The value divided by is set in the operation reception valid period start timer counter for the dialogue operation effect of the sub RAM 120c. Further, the sub CPU 120a obtains the remaining time until the end time (time t _{SR2 in} FIG. 15) of the operation acceptance valid period of the dialogue operation effect within the variation time T of the variation, and divides this time by 2 milliseconds. Is set to the operation reception valid period end timer counter for the dialogue operation effect of the sub RAM 120c. The operation acceptance valid period start timer counter and the operation acceptance valid period end timer counter are counted down each time the timer updating process of step S1500 is executed. The operation reception valid period start timer counter becomes 0 at the start time (time t _{SR1 of} FIG. 15) of the operation reception valid period, and the operation reception valid period end timer counter shows the end time of the operation reception valid period (time of FIG. 15). It becomes 0 at t _SR2 ).

  In step S1654, the sub CPU 120a sets a dialogue operation effect standby flag in the dialogue operation effect standby flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c. The dialogue operation production standby flag is a flag indicating that the execution of the dialogue operation production is awaited.

  In step S1654, the sub CPU 120a sets the effect pattern designation command of the progress pattern determined in the progress mode determination process in the transmission buffer, and ends the dialogue operation effect selection process of this time.

  FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the details of the dialogue operation specific announcement production selection process (step S1656 in FIG. 47). In FIG. 64, the sub CPU 120a performs a dialogue operation specific notice effect execution determination process (S1656-1). In the dialogue operation specific announcement effect execution determination process, the sub CPU 120a acquires the effect random number value 12 updated in step S1100. The sub CPU 120a refers to the dialogue operation specific announcement effect execution determination table of the sub ROM 120b, and based on the combination of the jackpot determination result (big hit or loss) indicated by the variation start command in the reception buffer and the random number value for effect 12, the dialogue Whether or not it is necessary to execute the operation-specific notice effect is determined.

  FIG. 65 is a diagram showing a dialogue operation specific announcement effect execution determination table. In the dialogue operation specific notice effect execution determination table, a set of data indicating the effect random number value 12 and the necessity of execution (“execute” and “do not execute”) is displayed in the progress pattern SR50 (premium character). Appearance) is referred to when it is decided, and what is referred to when other things are decided are stored separately. Specifically, regarding the development pattern SR50, data indicating that one (0) random number for production 12 performs the dialogue operation specific notice production and 99 (2-99) random number for production 12 Is associated with data indicating that the dialogue operation specific notice effect is not executed. For those other than the progress pattern SR50, 100 (0 to 99) random numbers for effect 12 are associated with data indicating that the serif operation specific notice effect is not executed. As for data other than the development pattern SR50, no one of the effect random number 12 is associated with the data indicating that the dialogue operation specific notice effect is executed. With such a configuration of the table, the effect control board 120, when executing the dialogue operation effect during the variable display of the symbol, causes the specific notice effect to be executed before the operation of the effect button 35 in the dialog operation effect. Regulate.

  In step S1656-2, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether the determination result of the dialogue operation specific notice effect execution determination process is “execute” or “not execute”. When the determination result is “execute” (S1656-2: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1656-3. When the determination result is “not to execute” (S1656-2: No), the dialogue operation specific notice effect selection process of this time is ended.

  In step S1656-3, the sub CPU 120a generates an effect pattern designation command for instructing execution of the dialogue operation specific notice effect, sets the produced effect pattern designation command in the transmission buffer, and selects the dialogue operation specific notice effect this time. To finish.

  FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing details of the roulette operation effect selection processing (step S1657 in FIG. 47). In FIG. 66, the sub CPU 120a performs a roulette operation effect execution determination process (S1657-1). In the roulette operation effect execution determination process, the sub CPU 120a acquires the effect random number value 13 updated in step S1100. The sub CPU 120a refers to the roulette operation effect execution determination table of the sub ROM 120b, and based on the combination of the jackpot determination result (big hit or loss) indicated by the variation start command in the reception buffer and the effect random number value 13, the roulette operation effect. The necessity of execution of is determined.

  FIG. 67A is a diagram showing a roulette operation effect execution determination table. In the roulette operation effect execution determination table, the random number value for production 13 and the data set indicating the necessity of execution (“execute” and “do not execute”) are referred to when the jackpot determination result is a jackpot. It is memorized by dividing into what is referred to when. Specifically, for the jackpot, 55 (0 to 54) random number values 13 for effect are associated with data indicating that the roulette operation effect is executed, and 55 (55 to 99) effect numbers are used. The random number value 13 is associated with data indicating that the roulette operation effect is not executed. Regarding the loss, 55 (0 to 54) random number values 13 for effect are associated with data indicating that the roulette operation effect is executed, and 45 (55 to 99) random number values for effect 13 are roulette. It is associated with data indicating that the operation effect is not executed.

  In step S1657-2, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether the determination result of the roulette operation effect execution determination processing is “execute” or “not execute”. When the determination result is “execute” (S1657-2: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1657-3. When the determination result is “not executed” (S1657-2: No), the roulette operation effect selection process of this time is ended.

  In step S1657-3, the sub CPU 120a performs a progress mode determination process. The progress mode determination process is a process of determining the progress pattern of the roulette operation effect. The progress pattern indicates a notification mode of an operation result that progresses with the operation of the effect button 35 in the roulette operation effect as a trigger. In the progress mode determination process, the sub CPU 120a acquires the effect random number 14 updated in step S1100. The sub CPU 120a refers to the roulette operation effect progress mode determination table of the sub ROM 120b, and refers to the jackpot determination result (big hit or loss), the jackpot determination result (big hit or loss), and the reach establishment in the variation, which is indicated by the variation start command in the reception buffer. The development pattern of the roulette operation effect is determined on the basis of the presence / absence of the effect, the presence / absence of the pseudo continuous effect in the change, the SP reach effect in the change, and the combination with the effect random number 14.

  FIG. 67 (b) is a diagram showing a roulette operation effect development mode determination table. In the roulette operation effect progress mode determination table, the combination of the random number value 14 for effect and the progress pattern is a big hit determination result (big hit or loss), whether or not reach is established, whether or not there is pseudo continuous effect, and whether or not there is development to SP reach effect. Are stored for each one corresponding to the combination.

  Specifically, a progress pattern RL11 (a roulette roll is "!") And a progress pattern RL12 are selected as the options corresponding to the combinations of the jackpot, the reach not established, the pseudo continuous production, and the SP reach production in this table. (The roulette roll is “Chance”), the progress pattern RL13 (roulette roll is “NEXT”), and the progress pattern RL14 (roulette roll is “SP”). The development pattern RL11 has 95 production random number values 14, the development pattern RL12 has two production random number values 14, the development pattern RL13 has two production random number values 14, and the development pattern RL14 has One piece of production random number value 14 is associated with each.

  The options corresponding to the combinations of jackpot, reach establishment, no pseudo continuous production, and no SP reach production include progress patterns RL11, RL12, RL13, and RL14. Eighty production random number values 14 are assigned to the progress pattern RL11, fifteen performance random number values 14 are assigned to the progress pattern RL12, three performance random number values 14 are assigned to the progress pattern RL13, and three progress random number values 14 are assigned to the progress pattern RL14. Two effect random numbers 14 are associated with each other.

  The options corresponding to the combinations of big hit, reach establishment, pseudo continuous production, and no SP reach production are progress patterns RL11, RL12, RL13, and RL14. Eighty-five production random number values 14 are assigned to the progress pattern RL11, eight performance random number values 14 are assigned to the progress pattern RL12, five performance random number values 14 are assigned to the progress pattern RL13, and five progress random number values 14 are assigned to the progress pattern RL14. Two effect random numbers 14 are associated with each other.

  The options corresponding to the combinations of jackpot, presence of reach, presence of pseudo-relation, and presence of SP reach include progress patterns RL11, RL12, RL13, RL14, and RL15 (premium characters appear). Eighty-five production random number values 14 are assigned to the progress pattern RL11, five production random number values 14 are assigned to the progress pattern RL12, five production random number values 14 are assigned to the progress pattern RL13, and five progress random number values 14 are assigned to the progress pattern RL14. Four effect random number values 14 are associated with the effect pattern RL15, and one effect random number value 14 is associated with the progress pattern RL15.

  The options corresponding to the combinations of "Loss", "No reach reached", "No pseudo continuous effect", and "No SP reach effect" include progress patterns RL11, RL12, RL13, and RL14. 97 development random number values 14 in the development pattern RL11, one production random number value 14 in the development pattern RL12, one production random number value 14 in the development pattern RL13, and development progress RL14 in the development pattern RL14. One piece of production random number value 14 is associated with each.

  The options corresponding to the combinations of "Loss", "Reach" established, "No pseudo continuous effect", and "No SP reach effect" include progress patterns RL11, RL12, RL13, and RL14. Eighty-four production random number values 14 are assigned to the progress pattern RL11, thirteen production random number values 14 are assigned to the progress pattern RL12, two performance random number values 14 are assigned to the progress pattern RL13, and two progress random number values 14 are assigned to the progress pattern RL14. One piece of production random number value 14 is associated with each.

  The options corresponding to the combinations of "Loss", "Reach" established, "Pseudo continuous production", and "No SP reach production" include progress patterns RL11, RL12, RL13, RL14, and RL15. 88 progress random number values 14 are assigned to the progress pattern RL11, seven performance random number values 14 are assigned to the progress pattern RL12, four performance random number values 14 are assigned to the progress pattern RL13, and progress number RL14 is assigned to the progress pattern RL14. One piece of production random number value 14 is associated with each. None of the random numbers for production 14 are associated with the progress pattern RL15.

  Here, in this table, the difference between the selection rate in the case of a big hit in the development pattern RL11 and the selection rate in the case of a loss is up to 4%, whereas the selection in the case of a big hit in the development patterns RL12, RL13, and RL14. The difference between the rate and the selectivity in case of loss is 1% at the maximum. Progress pattern RL11 (roulette roll is "!"), Progress pattern RL12 (roulette roll is "Chance"), RL13 (roulette roll is "NEXT"), and RL14 (roulette roll is "SP"). )), The progress pattern RL11 is easily selected when the jackpot determination result is not a jackpot, and the progress patterns RL12, RL13, and RL14 are difficult to be selected when the jackpot determination result is not a jackpot.

In step S1557-4, the sub CPU120a obtains the time remaining until the start time of the operation acceptance lifetime of roulette operation effect in fluctuation period T of the fluctuation (time _{t RL1} in Fig. 16), the time 2 ms The value divided by is set in the operation reception valid period start timer counter for the roulette operation effect of the sub RAM 120c. The sub CPU120a determines the remaining time to the end time of the operation reception lifetime of the roulette operation effect in fluctuation period T of the fluctuation (time t _RL2 in Fig. _16), a value obtained by dividing the time 2 ms Is set in the operation reception valid period end timer counter for the roulette operation effect of the sub RAM 120c. The operation acceptance valid period start timer counter and the operation acceptance valid period end timer counter are counted down each time the timer updating process of step S1500 is executed. The operation acceptance valid period start timer counter becomes 0 at the start time of the operation acceptance valid period (time t _{RL1 in} FIG. 16), and the operation acceptance valid period end timer counter indicates the end time of the operation acceptance valid period (time in FIG. 16). It becomes 0 at t _RL2 ).

  In step S1557-5, the sub CPU 120a sets the roulette operation effect standby flag in the roulette operation effect standby flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c. The roulette operation effect standby flag is a flag indicating that the roulette operation effect is on standby.

  In step S1557-6, the sub CPU 120a sets the effect pattern designation command of the progress pattern determined in the progress mode determination process in the transmission buffer, and ends the current roulette operation effect selection process.

  FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the details of the roulette operation specific notice effect selection process (step S1659 in FIG. 47). In FIG. 68, the sub CPU 120a performs a roulette operation specific notice effect execution determination process (S1659-1). In the roulette operation specific announcement effect execution determination process, the sub CPU 120a acquires the effect random number value 15 updated in step S1100. The sub CPU 120a refers to the roulette operation specific notice effect execution determination table of the sub ROM 120b, and based on the combination of the jackpot determination result (big hit or loss) and the effect random number 15, whether or not to execute the roulette operation specific notice effect. To judge.

  FIG. 69 is a diagram showing a roulette operation specific advance notice effect execution determination table. In the roulette operation specific notice effect execution determination table, a set of data indicating the effect random number 15 and the necessity of execution (“execute” and “do not execute”) is displayed in the progress pattern RL15 (premium character) in the progress mode determination process. The words that are referred to when the words are determined) and those that are referred to when the other things are determined are stored separately. Specifically, with regard to the progress pattern RL15, data indicating that one (0) random number 12 for effect executes the roulette operation specific notice effect, and 99 (1 to 99) random number values for effect 12 Is associated with data indicating that the roulette operation specific notice effect is not executed. For those other than the development pattern RL15, 100 (0 to 99) random numbers for effect 12 are associated with data indicating that the roulette operation specific notice effect is not executed. As for data other than the development pattern RL15, no one of the effect random number values 12 is associated with the data indicating that the roulette operation specific notice effect is executed. With such a configuration of the table, the effect control board 120, when executing the roulette operation effect during the variable display of the symbol, causes the specific notice effect to be executed before the operation of the effect button 35 in the roulette operation effect is executed. Regulate.

  In step S1659-2, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether the determination result of the roulette operation specific notice effect execution determination process is “execute” or “not execute”. When the determination result is “execute” (S1659-2: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1659-3. When the determination result is “not executed” (S1659-2: No), the roulette operation specific notice effect selection process of this time is ended.

  In Step S1659-3, the sub CPU 120a generates an effect pattern designating command for instructing execution of the roulette operation specific notice effect, sets the generated effect pattern designation command in the transmission buffer, and selects the roulette operation specifying notice effect this time. To finish.

  FIG. 70 is a flow chart showing details of the gauge operation effect selection process (step S1660 in FIG. 47). In FIG. 70, the sub CPU 120a performs a gauge operation effect execution determination process (S166-1). In the gauge operation effect execution determination process, the sub CPU 120a acquires the effect random number 16 updated in step S1100. The sub CPU 120a refers to the gauge operation effect execution determination table of the sub ROM 120b, and based on the combination of the jackpot determination result (big hit or loss) indicated by the variation start command in the reception buffer and the random number value 16 for effect, the gauge operation effect. The necessity of execution of is determined.

  FIG. 71 is a diagram showing a gauge operation effect execution determination table. In the gauge operation effect execution determination table, the set of data indicating the effect random number 16 and the necessity of execution (“execute” and “do not execute”) is referred to when the jackpot determination result is a jackpot. It is memorized by dividing into what is referred to when. Specifically, for the jackpot, 55 (0 to 54) random number values for production 16 are associated with data indicating that the gauge operation production is executed, and 45 (55 to 99) for production. The random number value 16 is associated with data indicating that the gauge operation effect is not executed. Regarding the loss, 45 (0 to 44) random number values for effect 16 are associated with data indicating that the gauge operation effect is executed, and 55 (45 to 99) random number values for effect 16 are equivalent to the gauge. It is associated with data indicating that the operation effect is not executed.

  In step S1660-2, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether the determination result of the gauge operation effect execution determination process is “execute” or “not execute”. If the determination result is “execute” (S1660-2: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1660-3. When the determination result is “not to execute” (S1660-2: No), the current gauge operation effect selection process ends.

  In step S1660-3, the sub CPU 120a performs a final stage determination process. The final stage determination process is a process of determining the final acquisition point of the gauge operation effect. In the final stage determination process, the sub CPU 120a acquires the effect random number values 17, 18, and 19 updated in step S1100. The sub CPU 120a refers to the reference destination determination table of the sub ROM 120b, and determines the jackpot determination result (big hit or loss) indicated by the fluctuation start command in the reception buffer, whether or not the SP reach reach effect has been developed, and the SPSP reach effect effect. Based on the presence / absence, one of the upper tables 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6, the middle table, and the lower table of the sub ROM 120b to be referred to is determined. The sub CPU 120a refers to the reference destination one of the upper tables 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6 and determines the hundreds digit based on the effect random number 17. The sub CPU 120a refers to the intermediate table and determines the number of tens based on the random number value for presentation 18. The sub CPU 120a refers to the lower table and determines the digit of one place based on the random number value 19 for effect. Then, the sub CPU 120a adds the hundreds digit, the tens digit, and the ones digit, and sets the addition result as the final acquisition point.

  FIG. 72 is a diagram showing a reference destination determination table. FIG. 73A shows the upper table 1. FIG. 73 (b) is a diagram showing the upper table 2. FIG. 73C is a diagram showing the upper table 3. FIG. 73D is a diagram showing the upper table 4. FIG. 73 (e) is a diagram showing the upper table 5. FIG. 73 (f) is a diagram showing the upper table 6. FIG. 74 (a) is a diagram showing a middle table. FIG. 74 (b) is a diagram showing a lower table.

  In the reference destination determination table, the reference destinations for the combination of jackpot, no SP reach production development, and no SPSP reach production development are the upper table 1, the middle table, and the lower table. The addition result of the hundreds digit, the tens digit, and the ones digit determined by the upper table 1, the middle table, and the lower table is a number in the range of 3001 to 7999.

  The reference destinations of the combinations of the jackpot, the SP reach reach development, and the SPSP reach achievement development are the upper table 2, the middle table, and the lower table. The addition result of the hundreds digit, the tens digit, and the ones digit determined by the upper table 2, the middle table, and the lower table is a number in the range of 3001 to 9999.

  The reference destinations for the combination of jackpot, no SP reach production development, and SPSP reach production development are the upper table 3, the middle table, and the lower table. The addition result of the hundreds digit, the tens digit, and the ones digit determined by the upper table 3, the middle table, and the lower table is a number in the range of 3001 to 13599.

  The reference destinations for the combinations of loss, no SP reach effect development, and no SPSP reach effect development are the upper table 4, the middle table, and the lower table. The addition result of the hundreds digit, the tens digit, and the ones digit determined by the upper table 4, the middle table, and the lower table is a number other than 3333 in the range of 3001 to 7999.

  The reference destinations for the combinations with loss, SP reach production development, and without SPSP reach production development are the upper table 5, the middle table, and the lower table. The addition result of the hundreds digit, the tens digit, and the ones digit determined by the upper table 5, the middle table, and the lower table is the number excluding 3333 and 7777 in the range of 3001 to 9999. become.

  The reference destinations for the combinations of loss, no SP reach production development, and SPSP reach production development are the upper table 6, the middle table, and the lower table. The addition result of the hundreds digit, the tens digit, and the ones digit determined by the upper table 6, the middle table, and the lower table is the number excluding 3333 and 7777 in the range of 3001 to 13599. become.

  More specifically, in FIG. 73, the options of the upper tables 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6 include the number of 500 increments between 1500 and 10000, 3333, and 7777. In the upper table 1, each production number between 1500 and 7500 and 1333 are associated with one to twenty-three production random number values 17. No random number 17 for effect is associated with each number between 8000 and 10000 and 7777. In the upper table 2, 1 to 24 random number values for presentation 17 are associated with each number between 1500 and 9500, 3333, and 7777. No single production random number 17 is associated with 10000. In the high-order table 3, 1 to 24 random number values for presentation 17 are associated with each number between 1500 and 10000, 3333, and 7777. In the upper table 4, 2-25 random numbers 17 for effect are associated with each number between 1500-7500. No single production random number 17 is associated with each number between 8000 and 10000, 3333, and 7777. In the upper table 5, 1-25 random number values 17 for effect are associated with each number between 1500-9500. No single production random number 17 is associated with 10000, 3333, and 7777. In the upper table 6, 1-25 random number values 17 for production are associated with each number between 1500-10000. No effect random number 17 is associated with 3333 and 7777.

  In FIG. 74, the options for the middle table include the number of 50 increments between 150 and 400. To each of these numbers, 15 to 20 random number values for presentation 18 are associated. The lower table options include the numbers between 1 and 99 excluding 33 and 77. Each of these numbers is associated with one or two performance random number values 19. Here, when the upper table 1, 2, 3 is the reference destination and the number determined from the reference destination table 1, 2, or 3 is 3333 or 7777, the numbers determined from the middle table and the lower table are added. Instead, 3333 or 7777 will be the final score.

In step S1660-4, the sub CPU 120a performs a progress mode determination process. The progress mode determination process is a process of determining a gauge progress pattern in the gauge operation effect. Gauge progress pattern, the final stage determination process time _t in the gauge operation effect in case of a final acquisition points 100% as determined by _GG0, t _{GG1, t GG2,} t _{GG3, t GG4,} and progress ratio of _{t GG5} Is shown. For example, the final acquisition point is 10000 points, the progress rate of the time _{t GG0 0%} progression rate of _{t GG1} 20%, progress ratio of the time _{t GG2} 30%, progress ratio of the time _{t GG3} 60% _{Assuming that} the progress rate at time t _GG4 is 90% and the progress rate at time t _GG5 is 100%, the mode of increase in the gauge progress amount is 0 (t _GG0 ) → 2000 (t _GG1 ) → 3000 (t _GG2 ) → 6000. (T _GG3 ) → 9000 (t _GG4 ) → 10000 (t _GG5 ). In the progress mode determination process, the sub CPU 120a acquires the effect random number 20 updated in step S1100. The sub CPU 120a refers to the gauge operation effect development mode determination table of the sub ROM 120b to determine the gauge development pattern.

FIG. 75 is a diagram showing a gauge operation effect development mode determination table. The gauge operation effect development mode determination table stores a combination of the effect random number 20 and the gauge operation pattern. There are gauge progress patterns GG11, GG12, GG13, and GG14 as options in the gauge operation effect progress state determination table. In the gauge progress patterns GG11, GG12, GG13, and GG14, the progress rates of the time t _GG0 and the time t _GG5 are common (time t _GG0 is 0% and time t _GG5 is 100%), and time t _GG1 , t _GG2 , and t. _GG3, and progress percentage of _{t GG4} has become a different value. Twenty-five random numbers 20 for presentation are associated with the gauge development patterns GG11, GG12, GG13, and GG14, respectively.

In step S1660-5, the sub CPU 120a obtains the remaining time until the start time (time t _{GG3 in} FIG. 17) of the operation acceptance valid period of the gauge operation effect within the variation time T of the variation, and this time is 2 milliseconds. The value divided by is set in the operation acceptance valid period start timer counter for the gauge operation effect of the sub RAM 120c. Further, the sub CPU 120a obtains the remaining time until the end time (time t _{GG4 in} FIG. 13) of the operation acceptance valid period of the gauge operation effect within the variation time T of the variation, and divides this time by 2 milliseconds. Is set in the operation counter valid period end timer counter for the gauge operation effect of the sub RAM 120c. The operation acceptance valid period start timer counter and the operation acceptance valid period end timer counter are counted down each time the timer updating process of step S1500 is executed. The operation reception valid period start timer counter becomes 0 at the start time (time t _{GG3 in} FIG. 17) of the operation reception valid period, and the operation reception valid period end timer counter indicates the end time of the operation reception valid period (time in FIG. 17). It becomes 0 at t _GG4 ).

  In step S1660-6, the sub CPU 120a sets the gauge operation effect standby flag in the gauge operation effect standby flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c. The gauge operation effect standby flag is a flag indicating that the gauge operation effect is on standby.

  In step S1660-7, the sub CPU 120a sets, in the transmission buffer, a production pattern designating command that designates the final acquisition points determined in the final stage determination processing and the gauge development pattern determined in the development mode determination processing, and the gauge operation production this time. The selection process ends.

  FIG. 76 is a flow chart showing details of the gauge operation specific notice effect selection process (step S1662 of FIG. 47). In FIG. 76, the sub CPU 120a performs a gauge operation specific advance notice effect execution determination process (S1662-1). In the gauge operation specific announcement effect execution determination process, the sub CPU 120a acquires the effect random number value 21 updated in step S1100. The sub CPU 120a refers to the gauge operation specific announcement effect execution determination table of the sub ROM 120b, and determines whether or not to execute the gauge operation specific announcement effect based on the combination of the final score and the effect random number 21.

  FIG. 77 is a diagram showing a gauge operation specific announcement effect execution determination table. In the gauge operation specific notice production execution determination table, a set of data indicating the production random number 21 and the necessity of execution (“execute” and “do not execute”) is set in the final stage (step S1660- in FIG. 70). In 3), 10000 or more points are referred to when final points are obtained, 8000 to 9999 points are referred to as final points, and points less than 8000 are final points. It is memorized separately from what is referred to when it is called.

  Specifically, for 10000 or more, data indicating that 55 (0 to 54) random number values for production 21 execute the gauge operation specific announcement production, and 45 (55 to 99) random number values for production. Reference numeral 21 is associated with data indicating that the gauge operation specific announcement effect is not executed. For 8000 to 9999, data indicating that 20 (0 to 19) random number values for performance 21 execute the gauge operation specific notice effect, and 80 (20 to 99) random number values for performance 21 are for gauge operation. Each is associated with data indicating that the specific notice effect is not executed. For less than 8000, 100 (0 to 99) random number values for production 21 are associated with data indicating that the gauge operation specific announcement production is not executed. For less than 8000, no one of the effect random number values 21 is associated with the data indicating that the gauge operation specific notice effect is executed. With such a configuration of the table, when the effect control board 120 executes the gauge operation effect as an effect that can progress to a stage of 8000 points or more during the variable display of the symbols, the specific notice before the execution of the gauge operation effect. It is possible to execute the performance. Further, when the gauge operation effect is executed as an effect that cannot progress to the stage of 8000 points or more, execution of the specific notice effect is restricted before the operation of the effect button 35 in the gauge operation effect is executed.

  In step S1662-2, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether the determination result of the gauge operation specific advance notice effect execution determination process is “execute” or “not execute”. When the determination result is “execute” (S1662-2: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1662-3. When the determination result is “not to execute” (S1662-2: No), the current gauge operation specific notice effect selection process is ended.

  In step S1662-3, the sub CPU 120a generates an effect pattern designation command for instructing execution of the gauge operation specific advance notice effect, sets the generated effect pattern designation command in the transmission buffer, and selects the current gauge operation specific advance notice effect selection process. To finish.

  78 is a flowchart showing details of the timing operation effect selection process (step S1663 in FIG. 47). In FIG. 78, the sub CPU 120a performs a timing operation effect execution determination process (S1663-1). In the timing operation effect execution determination process, the sub CPU 120a acquires the effect random number value 22 updated in step S1100. The sub CPU 120a refers to the timing operation effect execution determination table of the sub ROM 120b, and based on the combination of the jackpot determination result (big hit or loss) indicated by the variation start command in the reception buffer and the effect random number value 22, the timing operation effect. The necessity of execution of is determined.

  FIG. 79 is a diagram showing a timing operation effect execution determination table. In the timing operation effect execution determination table, the data set indicating the effect random number 22 and the necessity of execution (“execute” and “do not execute”) is referred to when the jackpot determination result is a jackpot. It is memorized by dividing into what is referred to when. Specifically, for the jackpot, data indicating that 55 (0 to 54) random number values for effect 22 execute the timing operation effect and 45 (55 to 99) effect random number values 22 are for the timing. Each is associated with data indicating that the operation effect is not executed. Regarding the loss, data indicating that 45 (0 to 44) random number values for effect 22 execute the timing operation effect, and 55 (45 to 99) random number values for effect 22 do not execute the timing operation effect. It is associated with data indicating that.

  In step S1663-2, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether the determination result of the timing operation effect execution determination process is “execute” or “not execute”. When the determination result is “execute” (S1663-2: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1663-3. When the determination result is “not executed” (S1663-2: No), the current timing operation effect selection process ends.

In step S1663-3, the sub CPU 120a performs a progress mode determination process. The progress mode determination process is a process of determining the progress pattern of the timing operation effect. The progress pattern indicates a notification mode of an operation result that progresses when an operation is performed in accordance with the appearance timing of the image of the effect button 35 (time t _TM1 , t _TM2 , t _TM3 , t _{TM4 in} FIG. 17). It is a thing. In the progress mode determination process, the sub CPU 120a acquires the effect random number 23 updated in step S1100. The sub CPU 120a refers to the timing operation effect development mode determination table of the sub ROM 120b, and determines whether or not the SP reach effect indicated by the variation start command in the reception buffer is developed, whether or not the SP SP reach effect is indicated, and a random number value for effect. Based on the combination of 23, the progress pattern of the timing operation effect is determined.

  FIG. 80 is a diagram showing a timing operation effect development mode determination table. In the timing operation production progress mode determination table, a set of production random number values 23 and progress patterns is stored for each corresponding to the presence / absence of SP reach production and the combination of presence / absence of SPSP reach production.

An option corresponding to the combination of no SP reach production development and SPSP reach production development in this table is a progress pattern TM11. The progression pattern TM11 is associated with 100 (0 to 99) random number values 23 for presentation. In the development pattern TM11, when the operation is completed (the operation timings of pressing the effect button 35 multiple times are the appearance timings t _TM1 , t _TM2 , t _TM3 , t _TM4 of the images of the first to fourth effect buttons 35). Character image of "EXCELLENT" appears. If the single operation succeeds, a character image of “GOOD” appears every time the success occurs, and if the single operation fails, a character image of “miss” appears each time the failure fails. If the effect button 35 is kept pressed before the appearance of the image of the effect button 35, all the subsequent operations are invalidated. Further, in the progress pattern TM11, the development notification image (character image of “SP”) does not appear even if the operation is completed.

  The options corresponding to the combinations with and without SPSP reach production in this table include progress patterns TM11 and TM12. 45 (0 to 44) random number values 23 for effect are associated with the progress pattern TM11, and 55 (45 to 99) random number values 23 for effect are associated with the progress pattern TM12. .. In the development pattern TM12, when the operation is completed, the character image of "EXCELLENT" appears. Further, if the single operation succeeds, a character image of "GOOD" appears every time it succeeds, and if the single operation fails, a character image of "miss" appears each time it fails. If the production button 35 is kept pressed before the appearance of the image of the production button 35, all the subsequent operations are invalidated. Further, in the progress pattern TM12, unlike the progress pattern TM11, when the operation is completed, the development notification image (character image of “SP”) appears.

  There are progress patterns TM11 and TM12 as the options corresponding to the combination of SP reach reach development not developed and SP SP reach reach development in this table. The development pattern TM11 is associated with 55 (0 to 54) random number values 23 for effect, and the development pattern TM12 is associated with 45 (55 to 99) random number values 23 for effect. ..

  With such a configuration of the table, the effect control board 120 enables the display of the development notification image after the completion of the operation when the SP reach effect or the SPSP reach effect is developed in the variation. Further, when there is no development to either SP reach production or SPSP reach production in the variation, the display of the development notification image after the completion of the operation is restricted.

In step S1663-4, the sub CPU 120a obtains the remaining time until the appearance timing of the first image of the effect button 35 (time t _{TM1 in} FIG. 18) within the variation time T of the variation, and this time is 2 mm. The value divided by the second is set in the timer operation determination time (1) timer counter of the sub RAM 120c. The sub CPU 120a obtains the remaining time until the appearance timing (time t _{TM2 in} FIG. 18) of the second image of the effect button 35 within the variation time T of the variation, and divides this time by 2 milliseconds. The timing operation determination time (2) of the sub RAM 120c is set in the timer counter. The sub CPU 120a obtains the remaining time until the appearance timing of the third image of the effect button 35 (time t _{TM3 in} FIG. 18) within the variation time T of the variation, and divides this time by 2 milliseconds. The timing operation determination time (3) of the sub RAM 120c is set in the timer counter. The sub CPU 120a obtains the remaining time until the appearance timing (time t _{TM4 in} FIG. 18) of the fourth image of the effect button 35 within the variation time T of the variation, and divides this time by 2 milliseconds. The timing operation determination time (4) of the sub RAM 120c is set in the timer counter.

The timing operation determination time (1) timer counter, the timing operation determination time (2) timer counter, the timing operation determination time (3) timer counter, and the timing operation determination time (4) timer counter execute the timer update processing of step S1500. Every time is counted down. The timing operation determination time (1) timer counter becomes 0 at the appearance timing (time t _{TM1 in} FIG. 18) of the first image of the effect button 35, and the timing operation determination time (2) timer counter changes to the effect button 35. It becomes 0 at the appearance timing of the second image (time t _{TM2 in} FIG. 18), and the timing operation determination time (3) timer counter indicates the appearance timing of the third image of the effect button 35 (time in FIG. 18). It becomes 0 at t _TM3 ), and the timer operation determination time (4) timer counter becomes 0 at the appearance timing (time t _{TM4 in} FIG. 18) of the fourth image of the effect button 35.

In Step S1663-5, the sub CPU 120a obtains the remaining time until the time of completion of the pentagon having the image of the effect button 35 as the vertex (time t _{TM5 in} FIG. 18), and divides this time by 2 milliseconds. Is set to the operation acceptance valid period end timer counter for the timing operation effect of the sub RAM 120c. The operation acceptance valid period end timer counter is decremented each time the timer updating process of step S1500 is executed. The operation acceptance valid period end timer counter becomes 0 at the time of completion of the pentagon (time t _{TM5 in} FIG. 18).

  In step S1663-6, the sub CPU 120a sets the timing operation effect standby flag in the timing operation effect standby flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c. The timing operation effect standby flag is a flag indicating that it is waiting for execution of the timing operation effect.

  In step S1663-7, the sub CPU 120a sets the effect pattern designation command indicating the progress pattern determined in the progress mode determination process in the transmission buffer, and ends the current timing operation effect selection process.

  FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing details of the reach back button operation effect selection process (step S1664 in FIG. 47). In FIG. 81, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the reach is established by the variation (S1664-1). When the reach is established by the change (S1664-1: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1664-2. If the reach is not established due to the variation (S1664-1: No), the reach back button operation effect selection process of this time is ended.

In step S1664-2, the sub CPU 120a performs a progress mode determination process. The progress mode determination process is a process of determining the progress pattern of the back button operation effect. The progress pattern indicates a notification mode of the operation result that progresses when the operation is performed in accordance with the reach establishment timing t _NR . In the progress mode determination process, the sub CPU 120a acquires the effect random number 24 updated in step S1100. The sub CPU 120a refers to the reach back button operation effect development mode determination table of the sub ROM 120b, and based on the combination of the jackpot determination result (big hit or loss) and the random number value for effect 24 indicated by the variation start command in the reception buffer, the reach is reached. Determine the development pattern of the back button operation effect.

  FIG. 82 is a diagram showing a reach back button operation effect development mode determination table. In the reach back button operation effect progress mode determination table, the set of the effect random number 24 and the progress pattern are stored separately for those referred to when the jackpot determination result is a big hit and those referred to when the jackpot is lost. There is.

Options corresponding to the jackpots in this table include progress patterns RC11, RC12, and RC13. The development pattern RC11 is associated with 10 (0 to 9) random number values 24 for effect, and the progress pattern RC12 is associated with 70 (10 to 79) random number values 24 for effect. The development pattern RC13 is associated with 20 (80 to 99) random number values 24 for presentation. Progress pattern RC11, RC12, and RC13 are back button presence or absence of an output of the operation success sound when a successful back button operation (when the operation timing of the operation button 35 is matched with the timing t _NR of formation of reach), and operation Is not displayed (when the operation timing of the operation button 35 does not match the reach timing t _NR ), the presence or absence of an image display indicating that is different.

  More specifically, in the development pattern RC11, when the back button operation is successful, the back button operation success voice is output. Moreover, if the effect button 35 is kept pressed, all the subsequent operations are invalidated. In the progress pattern RC12, the back button operation success voice is not output regardless of whether or not the back button operation is successful. Moreover, if the effect button 35 is kept pressed, all the subsequent operations are invalidated. In the development pattern RC13, when the back button operation is successful, the back button operation success voice is output. Moreover, if the effect button 35 is kept pressed, all the subsequent operations are invalidated. In the progress pattern RC13, when the operation is unsuccessful, the character image of "regret" is displayed.

  Options corresponding to the gaps in this table include progress patterns RC12 and RC14. Eighty (0 to 79) production random number values 24 are associated with the development pattern RC12, and twenty (80 to 99) production random number values 24 are associated with the development pattern RC14. There is. In the progress pattern RC14, the back button operation success voice is not output regardless of whether or not the back button operation is successful. Moreover, if the effect button 35 is kept pressed, all the subsequent operations are invalidated. If the back button operation fails, the character image of "Sorry" is displayed. Further, in the progress pattern RC14, if the effect button 35 is kept pressed, all the subsequent operations are invalidated.

  With such a configuration of the table, the effect control board 120 enables the output of the back button operation success voice when it is supposed to stop at the symbol corresponding to the big hit in the variation. Further, when it is supposed to stop at the symbol corresponding to the loss in the variation, the output of the back button operation success voice is regulated regardless of the success or failure of the back button operation.

  Here, comparing the above-mentioned timing operation effect development mode determination table (FIG. 80) and reach back button operation effect mode determination table (FIG. 82), there are two developments in the timing operation effect mode determination table. There are patterns TM11 and TM12, and in each of these two development patterns TM11 and TM12, a character image of “Miss” indicating that when the single operation fails is displayed. On the other hand, in the reach back button operation effect progress mode determination table, only the progress patterns RC13 and RC14 out of the four progress patterns RC11, RC12, RC13, and RC14 indicate the character "regret" when the operation fails. Images are displayed, and the selection rates of the development patterns RC13 and RC14 are as low as 20%. The reason for doing so is that if the character image of "sorry" appears too often, the player can easily succeed in the back button operation, which detracts from the interest of the game.

In step S1664-3, the sub CPU 120a obtains the remaining time until the reach time (time t _{NR in} FIG. 19) within the variation time T of the variation, and divides this time by 2 milliseconds to obtain the sub RAM 120c. Reach back button judgment time timer counter. The reach back button determination time timer counter is decremented each time the timer updating process of step S1500 is executed. The reach back button determination time timer counter becomes 0 at the time when the reach is established (time t _{NR in} FIG. 19).

In Step S1664-4, the sub CPU 120a sets a time after a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) after the reach is established within the fluctuation time T of the fluctuation to the end time t ′ _{NR of the} reach back button operation reception valid period. Then, the remaining time until the time t ′ _NR is obtained, and the value obtained by dividing the obtained remaining time by 2 milliseconds is set in the operation acceptance valid period end timer counter for the reach back button operation effect of the sub RAM 120c. The operation acceptance valid period end timer counter for the reach back button operation effect is counted down each time the timer updating process of step S1500 is executed. The operation acceptance valid period end timer counter becomes 0 2 seconds after the reach is established.

  In step S166-5, the sub CPU 120a sets the reach back button operation effect standby flag in the reach back button operation effect standby flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c. The reach back button operation effect standby flag is a flag indicating that it is waiting to execute the reach back button operation effect.

  In step S1664-4, the sub CPU 120a sets an effect pattern designation command indicating the progress pattern determined in the progress mode determination process in the transmission buffer, and ends the reach back button operation effect selection process this time.

  FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing details of the step-up back button operation effect selection process (step S1665 in FIG. 47). In FIG. 83, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not to execute a step-up effect as the symbol change effect of the change (S1665-1). When executing the step-up effect (S1665-1: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1665-2. When the step-up effect is not executed (S1665-1: No), this step-up back button operation effect selection process is ended.

  In step S1665-2, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the step-up effect within the variation is one that develops to the normal stage 4. The sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1665-3 when the development progresses to the normal stage 4 (S1665-2: Yes). When the development does not reach the normal stage 4 (S1665-2: No), the step-up back button operation effect selection process of this time is ended.

In step S1665-3, the sub CPU 120a performs progress mode determination processing. The progress mode determination process is a process of determining the progress pattern of the step-up back button operation effect. Progress pattern shows a notification manner of operation results progress as triggered by back button operation decision timing (time _t UR1 in FIG _{20, t UR2, t UR3,} t UR4) in the combined operation is performed .. In the progress mode determination process, the sub CPU 120a acquires the effect random number 25 updated in step S1100. The sub CPU 120a refers to the step-up back button operation effect development mode determination table of the sub ROM 120b, and based on the combination of the jackpot determination result (big hit or loss) and the random number value for effect 25, which is indicated by the variation start command in the reception buffer, Determine the progress pattern of the step-up back button operation effect.

  FIG. 84 is a diagram showing a step-up back button operation effect development mode determination table. In the step-up back button operation effect progress mode determination table, a set of the effect random number 25 and the progress pattern is stored separately for what is referred to when the big hit determination result is a big hit and for which it is referred to as a big hit. ing.

Options corresponding to the jackpots in this table include progress patterns RU11, RU12, and RU13. The development pattern RU11 is associated with 10 (0-9) random number values 25 for production, and the development pattern RU12 is associated with 70 (10-79) random number values 25 for production. Therefore, 20 (80 to 99) random numbers 25 for effect are associated with the progress pattern RU13. Progress pattern RU11, RU12, and RU13, when a successful back button operation (when the operation timing of the plurality of operation performance button 35 is fit with all the determination timing _{t UR1, t UR2, t UR3} , t UR4) the presence or absence of the display of the back button operation successful image, and when it fails to operate the that in (when the operation timing of the performance button 35 has not match with any of the determination timing _{t UR1, t UR2, t UR3} , t UR4) The presence or absence of the image display shown is different.

  Specifically, in the progress pattern RU11, when the back button operation is successful, the back button operation success image is displayed. Moreover, if the effect button 35 is kept pressed, all the subsequent operations are invalidated. In the progress pattern RU12, the back button operation success image is not displayed regardless of whether or not the back button operation is successful. Moreover, if the effect button 35 is kept pressed, all the subsequent operations are invalidated. In the progress pattern RU13, when the back button operation is successful, the back button operation success image is displayed. Moreover, if the effect button 35 is kept pressed, all the subsequent operations are invalidated. In the progress pattern RU13, when the operation is unsuccessful, a character image of "regret" is displayed.

  Options corresponding to the gaps in this table include the development patterns RU12 and RU14. Eighty (0 to 79) random number values 25 for production are associated with the development pattern RU12, and twenty (80 to 99) random number values 25 for production are associated with the development pattern RU14. There is. In the development pattern RU14, the back button operation success image is not displayed regardless of whether or not the back button operation is successful. Moreover, if the effect button 35 is kept pressed, all the subsequent operations are invalidated. In the progress pattern RU14, when the operation is unsuccessful, the character image of "regret" is displayed.

  With such a configuration of the table, the effect control board 120, when executing the step-up back button operation effect, is to stop at the symbol corresponding to the jackpot in the variable display, when the back button operation success image is displayed. Display is possible. Further, when the variable display is to be stopped at the symbol corresponding to the loss, the display of the back button operation success image is regulated regardless of the success or failure of the back button operation.

  Here, when comparing the timing operation effect development mode determination table (FIG. 80) and the step-up back button operation effect mode determination table (FIG. 84) mentioned above, there are two in the timing operation effect mode determination table. There are progress patterns TM11 and TM12, and in each of these two progress patterns TM11 and TM12, a character image of "Miss" indicating that when the single operation fails is displayed. On the other hand, in the reach back button operation effect development mode determination table, only the development patterns RU13 and RU14 out of the four development patterns RU11, RU12, RU13, and RU14 indicate the "sad" character when the operation fails. The image is displayed, and the selection rates of the development patterns RU13 and RU14 are as low as 20%. The reason for doing so is that if the character image of "sorry" appears too often, the player can easily succeed in the back button operation, which detracts from the interest of the game.

In step S1665-4, the sub CPU 120a obtains the remaining time until the first back button operation determination timing (time t _{UR1 in} FIG. 20) within the variation time T of the variation, and divides this time by 2 milliseconds. The set value is set in the back button operation determination time (1) timer counter of the sub RAM 120c. The sub CPU 120a obtains the remaining time until the second back button operation determination timing (time t _{UR2 in} FIG. 20) within the variation time T of the variation, and divides this time by 2 milliseconds to obtain a value of the sub RAM 120c. Back button operation determination time (2) Set in timer counter. The sub CPU 120a obtains the remaining time up to the third back button operation determination timing (time t _{UR3 in} FIG. 20) within the variation time T of the variation, and divides this time by 2 milliseconds to obtain a value of the sub RAM 120c. Back button operation determination time (3) Set in timer counter. The sub CPU 120a obtains the remaining time until the fourth back button operation determination timing (time t _{UR4 in} FIG. 20) within the variation time T of the variation, and divides this time by 2 milliseconds to obtain a value of the sub RAM 120c. Back button operation determination time (4) Set in timer counter.

The back button operation determination time (1) timer counter, the back button operation determination time (2) timer counter, the back button operation determination time (3) timer counter, and the back button operation determination time (4) timer counter are timers of step S1500. It is counted down each time the update process is executed. The back button operation determination time (1) timer counter becomes 0 at the first back button operation determination timing (time t _{UR1 in} FIG. 20), and the back button operation determination time (2) timer counter is the second. It becomes 0 at the back button operation determination timing (time t _{UR2 in} FIG. 20), and the back button operation determination time (3) timer counter becomes 0 at the third back button operation determination timing (time t _{UR3 in} FIG. 20). Then, the back button operation determination time (4) timer counter becomes 0 at the fourth back button operation determination timing (time t _{UR4 in} FIG. 20).

In step S1665-5, the sub CPU 120a obtains the remaining time until the execution time (step t _{SUP4 in} FIG. 20) of the step production of the normal stage 4 of the step-up production within the variation time T of the variation, and the obtained remaining time. Is set to a step-up back button operation effect operation acceptance valid period end timer counter of the sub RAM 120c. The operation reception valid period end timer counter for the step-up back button operation effect is counted down each time the timer updating process of step S1500 is executed. The operation acceptance valid period end timer counter becomes 0 at the execution time of the step effect of the normal stage 4 (time t _{SUP4 in} FIG. 20).

  In step S1665-6, the sub CPU 120a sets the step-up back button operation effect standby flag in the step-up back button operation effect standby flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c. The step-up back button operation effect standby flag is a flag indicating that the step-up back button operation effect is on standby.

  In step S1665-7, the sub CPU 120a sets the effect pattern designation command indicating the progress pattern determined in the progress mode determination process in the transmission buffer, and ends the current back button operation effect selection process.

  FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing details of the special game effect selection processing (step S1691 in FIG. 48). In FIG. 70, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the type of jackpot that triggered the special game this time is a 2R certainty variation hit (S1691-1). When the type of jackpot is the 2R probability variation hit (S1691-1: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1691-2. When it is not the 2R probability variation hit (S1691-1: No), the process proceeds to step S1691-3.

  In step S1691-2, the sub CPU 120a determines to perform the opening effect per 2R, and stores the information of the opening effect pattern per 2R in the effect pattern storage area.

  In step S1691-3, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the type of jackpot that triggered the special game this time is a 16R probability variation hit. When the type of jackpot is the 16R probability variation hit (S1691-3: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1691-4. If it is not the 16R probability change hit (S1691-3: No), the process proceeds to step S1691-5.

  In step S1691-4, the sub CPU 120a determines to perform the opening effect per 16R, and stores the information of the opening effect pattern per 16R in the effect pattern storage area.

  In Step S1691-5, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the type of the big hit that triggered the special game this time is the 8R certainty change hit. When the type of jackpot is the 8R probability variation hit (S1691-5: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1691-6. If it is the 8R normal hit (S1691-5: No), the process proceeds to step S1691-7.

  In step S1691-6, the sub CPU 120a determines to perform the promotion success effect, and stores promotion effect execution data indicating that the promotion success effect is to be executed in the round-based effect information storage area of the fourth round of the sub RAM 120c. To do.

  In Step S1691-7, the sub CPU 120a determines to perform the promotion failure effect, and stores promotion effect execution data indicating that the promotion failure effect is to be executed in the round-based effect information storage area of the fourth round of the sub RAM 120c. To do.

  After executing step S1691-6 or S1691-7, the sub CPU 120a determines to perform the opening effect per 8R, and stores the information of the opening effect pattern per 8R in the effect pattern storage area (S1691-8).

  In step S1691-9, the sub CPU 120a sets the effect pattern designation command for the opening effect determined in step S1691-2, S1691-4, or S1691-8 in the transmission buffer. Then, the special game selection process of this time is ended.

  FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing details of the round effect control process (step S1693 in FIG. 48). In FIG. 86, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the round start command in the reception buffer is for the fourth round (S1693-1). When the round start command in the reception buffer is for the fourth round (S1693-1: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1693-2. When the round is one other than the fourth round (S1693-1: No), the process proceeds to step S1963-6.

  In step S1693-2, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether or not promotion effect execution data is stored in the round-based effect information storage area of the sub RAM 120c. When the promotion effect execution data is stored (S1693-2: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1693-3. If the promotion effect execution data is not stored (S1693-2: No), the process proceeds to step S1693-6.

  In step S1693-3, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether the promotion effect execution data in the round-based effect information storage area indicates the execution of the promotion success effect or the execution of the promotion failure effect. If the promotion effect execution data indicates execution of the promotion success effect (S1693-3: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1693-4. When the promotion effect execution data indicates the execution of the promotion failure effect (S1693-3: No), the process proceeds to step S1693-5.

  In step S1693-4, the sub CPU 120a sets the promotion success production standby flag in the promotion production success standby flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c, and proceeds to step S1693-5. The promotion success effect standby flag is a flag indicating that the execution of the promotion success effect is awaited.

In step S1693-5, the sub CPU 120a obtains the remaining time until the start time (time t _{RDS in} FIG. 21) of the operation acceptance valid period of the continuous hit operation in the round game of this round (fourth round), and this time Is divided by 2 milliseconds and the value is set in the operation reception valid period start timer counter for promotion effect of the sub RAM 120c. Further, the sub CPU 120a obtains the remaining time until the end time (time t _{RDE in} FIG. 21) of the operation reception valid period of promotion effect in the current round game, and divides this time by 2 milliseconds to obtain the sub RAM 120c. Set to the timer counter for the operation acceptance valid period for promotion effect of. The operation acceptance valid period start timer counter and the operation acceptance valid period end timer counter are counted down each time the timer updating process of step S1500 is executed. The operation acceptance valid period start timer counter becomes 0 at the start time (time t _{RDS in} FIG. 21) of the operation acceptance valid period of the continuous hitting operation. The operation reception valid period end timer counter becomes 0 at the end time (time t _{RDE in} FIG. 21) of the operation reception valid period of the repeated hitting operation.

  In Step S1693-6, the sub CPU 120a sets an effect pattern designating command of the round effect of this round in the transmission buffer.

  87, 88, 89, 90, 91, 92, and 93 are flowcharts showing the details of the effect input control process (step S1700 in FIG. 45). In FIG. 87, the sub CPU 120a performs an operation information storage area update process. The operation information storage area updating process is a process of updating information in the operation information storage region of the sub RAM 120c.

  FIG. 94 (a) is a diagram showing the operation information storage area. FIG. 94 (b) is a diagram showing an example of updating the operation information storage area. As shown in FIG. 94 (a), the operation information storage area includes an up cursor key sampling signal storage area, a down cursor key sampling signal storage area, a left cursor key sampling signal storage area, a right cursor key sampling signal storage area, and a center key. It has a sampling signal storage area, a performance button sampling signal storage area, a performance button on-edge storage area, a performance button off-edge storage area, a performance button off-edge number storage area, and a performance button on-off edge signal number storage area. ..

  Each of the effect button sampling signal storage area, the effect button on-edge storage area, the effect button off-edge storage area, the effect button off-edge number storage area, and the effect button on-off edge signal number storage area is the latest sampling timing information. And a previous sampling storage unit that stores information on the sampling timing immediately before (2 msec).

  In the operation information storage area update processing, the sub CPU 120a updates the up cursor key sampling signal storage area based on the input signal of the detection switch 39a of the up cursor key 39A. Also, the down cursor key sampling signal storage area is updated based on the input signal of the detection switch 39b of the down cursor key 39B. Further, the left cursor key sampling signal storage area is updated based on the input signal of the detection switch 39c of the left cursor key 39C. Further, the right cursor key sampling signal storage area is updated based on the input signal of the detection switch 39d of the right cursor key 39D. Further, the central key sampling signal storage area is updated based on the input signal of the detection switch 39e of the central key 39E. Further, based on the input signal of the detection switch 35a of the effect button 35, the effect button sampling signal storage area, the effect button on-edge storage area, the effect button off-edge storage area, and the effect button on-off edge signal number storage area are updated. To do.

  More specifically, at the sampling timing of every 2 msec, the sub CPU 120a writes 1 in the upper cursor key sampling signal storage area if the input signal of the detection switch 39a is ON, and if the input signal of the detection switch 39a is OFF. For example, the upper cursor key writes 0 in the sampling signal storage area. If the input signal of the detection switch 39b is ON, 1 is written in the down cursor key sampling signal storage area, and if the input signal of the detection switch 39b is OFF, 0 is written in the down cursor key sampling signal storage area. If the input signal of the detection switch 39c is ON, 1 is written in the left cursor key sampling signal storage area, and if the input signal of the detection switch 39c is OFF, 0 is written in the left cursor key sampling signal storage area. If the input signal of the detection switch 39d is ON, 1 is written in the right cursor key sampling signal storage area, and if the input signal of the detection switch 39d is OFF, 0 is written in the right cursor key sampling signal storage area. If the input signal of the detection switch 39e is ON, 1 is written in the central key sampling signal storage area, and if the input signal of the detection switch 39e is OFF, 0 is written in the central key sampling signal storage area.

  The sub CPU 120a stores the information of the latest sampling storage unit in the effect button sampling signal storage area, the effect button on-edge storage area, the effect button off-edge storage area, and the effect button on-off edge signal number storage area in the previous sampling storage section. Copy each. Then, as shown in the update example of FIG. 94 (b), if the input signal of the detection switch 35a is ON, the sub CPU 120a writes 1 in the latest sampling storage section of the effect button sampling signal storage area, and the detection switch 35a. If the input signal is OFF, 0 is written in the latest sampling storage section of the effect button sampling signal storage area. If the previous sampling signal storage unit in the effect button sampling signal storage area is 0 and the latest sampling storage unit is 1, the sub CPU 120a writes 1 in the latest sampling storage unit in the effect button on-edge signal storage area, and any other combination. If the previous sampling signal is 1 → the latest sampling signal is 1, the previous sampling signal is 0 → the latest sampling signal is 0, or the previous sampling signal is 1 → the latest sampling signal is 0, the effect button on-edge signal storage area 0 is written in the latest sampling storage unit of.

  If the previous sampling signal storage unit of the effect button sampling signal storage area is 1 and the latest sampling storage unit is 0, the sub CPU 120a writes 1 to the latest sampling storage unit of the effect button off-edge signal storage area, and other combinations If the previous sampling signal is 1 → the latest sampling signal is 1, the previous sampling signal is 0 → the latest sampling signal is 0, or the previous sampling signal is 0 → the latest sampling signal is 1, the effect button off-edge signal storage area 0 is written in the latest sampling storage unit of.

  If the sub CPU 120a writes 1 in the latest sampling storage section of the effect button sampling signal storage area, the sub CPU 120a rewrites the number of latest sampling storage sections in the effect button on-off edge signal number storage area by +1 to produce the effect button sampling. If 0 is written in the latest sampling storage section of the signal storage area, the latest sampling storage section of the effect button on-off edge signal number storage area is reset to 0.

  In step S1702 of FIG. 87, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the dialogue operation production standby flag is set in the dialogue operation production standby flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c. The dialogue operation effect standby flag is set when it is determined to execute the dialogue operation effect in the dialogue operation effect selection process (step S1654 in FIG. 47) at the start of the change. When the dialogue operation effect standby flag is set (S1702: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1703. If the dialogue operation effect standby flag is not set (S1703: No), the process proceeds to step S1708.

In step S1703, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the operation acceptance valid period start timer counter for the dialogue operation effect is 0. After the start time (time t _{SR1 in} FIG. 15) of the operation acceptance valid period of the dialogue operation effect, the determination result of this step is “Yes”. If the operation reception valid period start timer counter is 0 (S1703: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1704. When the operation reception valid period start timer counter is not 0 (S1703: No), the process proceeds to step S1708.

In step S1704, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the operation acceptance valid period end timer counter for the dialogue operation effect is 0. If it is within the operation acceptance valid period of the dialogue operation effect (time t _{SR1 to} t _{SR2 in} FIG. 15), the determination result of this step is “No”, and the end time of the operation acceptance valid period of the dialogue operation effect (FIG. 15). At time t _SR2 ), the determination result of this step is “Yes”. If the operation reception valid period end timer counter is not 0 (S1704: No), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1705. When the operation acceptance valid period end timer counter is 0 (S1704: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1707.

  In step S1705, the sub CPU 120a determines whether 1 is written in the latest sampling signal storage unit in the effect button on edge storage area. Immediately after the effect button 35 is pressed, the determination result of this step is “Yes”. When 1 is written (S1705: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1706. When 0 is written (S1705: No), the process proceeds to step S1708.

  In step S1706, the sub CPU 120a sets an operation result notification designating command in the transmission buffer instructing the progress of the operation result in the dialogue operation effect to the notification, and proceeds to step S1707. The operation result notification designation command is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output process of step S1800. When the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 receive this operation result notification designation command, the image display device 31, the voice output device 32, and the drive device 33a for effect display the effect (FIG. 15) relating to the display of the character and the dialogue. , 33b, and the effect lighting device 34.

  In step S1707, the sub CPU 120a clears the dialogue operation effect standby flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c. Then, it progresses to step S1708.

  In step S1708 of FIG. 87, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the roulette operation effect standby flag is set in the roulette operation effect standby flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c. The roulette operation effect standby flag is set when it is determined to execute the roulette operation effect in the roulette operation effect selection process (step S1659 of FIG. 47) at the start of the change. If the roulette operation effect standby flag is set (S1708: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1709. When the roulette operation effect standby flag is not set (S1708: No), the process proceeds to step S1714.

In step S1709, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the operation acceptance valid period start timer counter for the roulette operation effect is 0. After the start time (time t _{RL1 in} FIG. 16) of the operation acceptance valid period of the roulette operation effect, the determination result of this step is “Yes”. When the operation reception valid period start timer counter is 0 (S1709: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1710. When the operation reception valid period start timer counter is not 0 (S1709: No), the process proceeds to step S1713.

In step S1710, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the operation acceptance valid period end timer counter for the roulette operation effect is 0. If it is within the operation acceptance valid period of the roulette operation effect (time t _{RL1 to} t _{RL2 in} FIG. 16), the determination result of this step is “No”, and the end time of the operation acceptance valid period of the roulette operation effect (FIG. 16). At time t _RL2 ), the determination result of this step is “Yes”. When the operation reception valid period end timer counter is not 0 (S1710: No), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1711. When the operation acceptance valid period end timer counter is 0 (S1710: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1714.

  In step S1711, the sub CPU 120a determines whether 1 is written in the latest sampling signal storage unit in the effect button on edge storage area. Immediately after the effect button 35 is pressed, the determination result of this step is “Yes”. When 1 is written (S1711: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1712. When 0 is written (S1711: No), the process proceeds to step S1714.

  In step S1712, the sub CPU 120a sets an operation result notification designating command for instructing the progress of the operation result in the roulette operation effect in the transmission buffer, and proceeds to step S1713. The operation result notification designation command is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output process of step S1800. When the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 receive the operation result notification designation command, the image display device 31, the sound output device 32, and the drive device 33a for effect display the effect (FIG. 16) related to the display of the outcome of the roulette. , 33b, and the effect lighting device 34.

  In step S1713, the sub CPU 120a clears the roulette operation effect standby flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c. Then, it progresses to step S1714.

  In step S1714 of FIG. 88, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the gauge operation effect standby flag is set in the gauge operation effect standby flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c. The gauge operation effect standby flag is set when it is determined to execute the gauge operation effect in the gauge operation effect selection process (step S1660 in FIG. 47) at the start of the change. If the gauge operation effect standby flag is set (S1714: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1715. When the gauge operation effect standby flag is not set (S1714: No), the process proceeds to step S1720.

In step S1715, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the operation acceptance valid period start timer counter for gauge operation effect is 0. After the start time (time t _{GG3 in} FIG. 17) of the operation acceptance valid period of the gauge operation effect, the determination result of this step is “Yes”. When the operation reception valid period start timer counter is 0 (S1715: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1716. When the operation reception valid period start timer counter is not 0 (S1715: No), the process proceeds to step S1720.

In step S1716, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the operation acceptance valid period end timer counter for the gauge operation effect is 0. Within operation accepting validity of the gauge operation effect (time t _{GG3 ~t} GG4 of Fig. _17), in this step the determination result is "No", the end time of the operation acceptance lifetime gauge operation effect (in FIG. 17 At time t _GG4 ), the determination result of this step is “Yes”. When the operation reception valid period end timer counter is not 0 (S1716: No), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1717. When the operation acceptance valid period end timer counter is 0 (S1716: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1718.

  In step S1717, the sub CPU 120a determines whether 1 is written in the latest sampling signal storage unit in the effect button on edge storage area. Immediately after the effect button 35 is pressed, the determination result of this step is “Yes”. When 1 is written (S1717: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1718. When 0 is written (S1717: No), the process proceeds to step S1720.

  In step S1718, the sub CPU 120a sets an operation result notification designating command instructing the progress of notification of the operation result in the gauge operation effect in the transmission buffer, and proceeds to step S1719. The operation result notification designation command is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output process of step S1800. When the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 receive this operation result notification designation command, the image display device 31, the voice output device, and the effect (FIG. 17) relating to the re-increasing of the gauge progress amount and the display of the final acquisition point. 32, the performance drive devices 33a and 33b, and the performance lighting device 34.

  In step S1719, the sub CPU 120a clears the gauge operation effect standby flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c. Then, it progresses to step S1720.

  In step S1720 of FIG. 89, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the timing operation effect standby flag is set in the timing operation effect standby flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c. The timing operation effect standby flag is set when it is determined to execute the timing operation effect in the timing operation effect selection process (step S1663 of FIG. 47) at the start of the change. When the timing operation effect standby flag is set (S1720: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1721. If the timing operation effect standby flag is not set (S1720: No), the process proceeds to step S1736.

In step S1721, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the operation acceptance valid period end timer counter for timing operation effect is 0. Until the time when the pentagon of the image of the effect button 35 in the timing operation effect is completed (time t _{TM5 in} FIG. 18), the determination result of this step is “No”. If the operation reception valid period end timer counter is not 0 (S1721: No), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1722. When the operation acceptance valid period end timer counter is 0 (S1721: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1735.

In step S1722, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the timing operation effect determination time (4) timer counter for the timing operation effect is 0. Until the appearance timing of the fourth image of the effect button 35 of the timing operation effect (time t _{TM4 in} FIG. 18), the determination result of this step is “No”. If the timing operation effect determination time (4) timer counter is not 0 (S1722: No), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1723. Timing operation effect determination time (4) When the timer counter is 0 (S1722: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1726.

In step S1723, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the timing operation effect determination time (3) timer counter for the timing operation effect is 0. The determination result of this step is “No” until the appearance timing (time t _{TM3 in} FIG. 18) of the third image of the effect button 35 of the timing operation effect. When the timer operation timing (3) timer counter is not 0 (S1723: No), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1724. When the timing operation effect determination time (3) timer counter is 0 (S1723: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1726.

In step S1724, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the timing operation effect determination time (2) timer counter for the timing operation effect is 0. Until the appearance timing of the second image of the effect button 35 of the timing operation effect (time t _{TM2 in} FIG. 18), the determination result of this step is “No”. If the timer operation timing (2) timer counter is not 0 (S1724: No), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1725. When the timing operation effect determination time (2) timer counter is 0 (S1724: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1726.

In step S1725, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the timing operation effect determination time (1) timer counter for the timing operation effect is 0. Until the appearance timing of the first image of the effect button 35 of the timing operation effect (time t _{TM1 in} FIG. 18), the determination result of this step is “No”. When the timing operation effect determination time (1) timer counter is not 0 (S1725: No), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1727. When the timing operation effect determination time (1) timer counter is 0 (S1725: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1726.

In step S1726, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the value of the latest sampling signal storage unit in the effect button on-off edge signal number storage area is equal to or larger than a predetermined value. The predetermined value in this step is a value obtained by dividing a period (for example, 1 second) sufficient for determining that the effect button 35 is continuously operated (pressed and held) by 2 milliseconds. To do. At the appearance timing of the image of the effect button 35 of the timing operation effect (time t _TM1 , t _TM2 , t _TM3 , or t _{TM4 in} FIG. 18), if the effect button 35 is continuously operated for 1 second or more, this The determination result of the step is “Yes”. If the value of the latest sampling signal storage unit in the effect button on-off edge signal count storage area is equal to or greater than the predetermined value (S1726: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1735. When the value of the latest sampling signal storage unit in the effect button on / off edge signal count storage area is less than the predetermined value (S1726: No), the process proceeds to step S1727.

  In step S1727, the sub CPU 120a determines whether 1 is written in the latest sampling signal storage unit in the effect button on edge storage area. When 1 is written (S1727: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1728. When 0 is written (S1727: No), the process proceeds to step S1736.

  In step S1728, the sub CPU 120a performs an operation determination process. The operation determination process is a process of determining whether or not the current operation is successful. In the operation determination process, the sub CPU 120a determines the operation timing of the current operation of the effect button 35, the first image, the second image, the third image, and the fourth image of the effect button 35. The time difference between each appearance timing and each time is calculated, and if there is less than a predetermined reference value in the calculated time difference, the operation is successful, and if there is no less than the reference value, the operation is unsuccessful.

  In step S1729, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether or not the determination result of the operation determination process of step S1728 is successful operation. If the operation is unsuccessful (S1729: No), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1730. When the operation is successful (S1729: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1731.

  In step S1730, sub CPU120a sets the failure designation | designated command which shows that the operation timing of operation of the production button 35 did not match the appearance timing of the image of the production button 35 in a transmission buffer, and progresses to step S1736. This failure designation command is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output process of step S1800. When the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 receive the failure designation command, the image display device 31, the sound output device 32, and the drive device 33a for effect display the effect (FIG. 18) relating to the display of the character image of "Miss". , 33b, and the effect lighting device 34.

In step S1731, the sub CPU 120a increments the operation success number N _TM in the timing operation success number storage area of the sub RAM 120c by +1 and updates it. After that, the process advances to step S1732.

In step S1732, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the updated number of successful operations N _TM has reached 4. If the number of successful operations N _TM has not reached 4 (S1732: No), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1733. When the number N _{TM of} successful operations reaches 4 (S1732: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1734.

  In step S1733, the sub CPU 120a sets a success designation command indicating that the operation timing of the operation of the effect button 35 matches the appearance timing of the image of the effect button 35 in the transmission buffer, and proceeds to step S1736. This success designation command is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output process of step S1800. When the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 receive the success designation command, the image display device 31, the voice output device 32, and the drive device 33a for the effect are provided for the effect (FIG. 18) related to the display of the character image of “GOOD”. , 33b, and the effect lighting device 34.

  In step S1734, the sub CPU 120a sets a completion designation command in the transmission buffer, which indicates that the operation timings of the operation of the effect button 35 multiple times match all the four appearance timings of the image of the effect button 35, It proceeds to step S1736. This completion designation command is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output process of step S1800. When the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 receive the success designation command, the image display device 31, the voice output device 32, and the drive device 33a for the production of the effect (FIG. 18) related to the display of the character image of "EXCELLENT". , 33b, and the effect lighting device 34. Further, the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140, in the timing operation effect selection process (step S1663 in FIG. 47) at the start of fluctuation of the fluctuation, progress pattern TM12 in the timing operation effect progress mode determination table (FIG. 80). If it is determined, the effect (FIG. 18) related to the display of the character image of “SP” is executed on the image display device 31, the sound output device 32, the effect drive devices 33a and 33b, and the effect illumination device 34. Let

  In step S1735, the sub CPU 120a clears the timing operation effect standby flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c. Then, it progresses to step S1736.

  Here, in the timing operation effect, for example, when the player performs a continuous hit operation (operation of pressing the effect button 35 multiple times) before and after the appearance of the image of the effect button 35, the operation is performed multiple times. If none of the operation timings match the appearance timing of the image of the effect button 35, the processing proceeds to S1727: Yes → S1728 → S1729: No → S1730 after each of the operations in S1720 to S1726. The character image of "Miss" is displayed. If the operation timing of any of the plurality of operations matches the appearance timing of the image of the effect button 35, the determination result of step S1729 is “Yes” at that time. After that, when the processing proceeds from S1731 → S1732: No → S1733, the character image of “GOOD” is displayed. When the processing proceeds from S1731 → S1732: Yes → S1734, the character image “EXCELLENT” is displayed.

  Further, if the player keeps pressing the effect button 35 before the appearance of the image of the effect button 35, the determination result of step S1726 becomes “Yes”, the process proceeds to step S1735, and the timing operation effect standby flag is cleared. To be done. After the timing operation effect standby flag is cleared, the determination result of step S1720 is “No”, and any character image of “miss”, “GOOD”, and “EXCELLENT” is irrespective of the operation of the effect button 35. It disappears.

  With such a processing flow, the effect control board 120 performs the operation on the effect button 35 a plurality of times when executing the timing operation effect, and the operation timing of any one of the plurality of operations is: When it matches the appearance timing of the image of the effect button 35, an effect of notifying the operation result in an effect mode corresponding to the operation timing and the appearance timing (the effect of displaying the character image of “GOOD” or “EXCELLENT”) ) Can be executed. Further, when the operation timing of any of the plurality of operations does not match the appearance timing of the image of the effect button 35, the effect of notifying the operation result in an effect mode corresponding to the matching of the operation timing and the appearance timing The effect of restricting the execution of (the effect of displaying the character image of “GOOD” or “EXCELLENT”) and notifying the operation result in the effect mode according to the operation timing and the appearance timing not matching (the character of “miss”) The effect of displaying an image) can be executed. Further, when the operation on the effect button 35 is continuously performed for a predetermined period (1 second) including the appearance timing of the image of the effect button 35 or more, execution of the effect itself informing the operation result is restricted. Further, when the start timing of the continuous operation of the effect button 35 coincides with the appearance timing of the image of the effect button 35, it is possible to execute the effect itself informing the operation result.

  In step S1736 of FIG. 90, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the reach back button operation effect standby flag is set in the reach back button operation effect standby flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c. The reach back button operation effect standby flag is set when it is determined that the reach back button operation effect is executed in the reach back button operation effect selection process (step S1664 of FIG. 47) at the start of the change. It is a thing. If the reach back button operation effect standby flag is set (S1736: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1737. If the reach back button operation effect standby flag is not set (S1736: No), the process proceeds to step S1746.

In step S1737, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the operation acceptance valid period end timer counter for the reach back button operation effect is 0. The determination result of this step is “No” until the end time of the operation acceptance valid period of the reach back button operation (1 second after the reach establishment time t _NR in FIG. 19). When the operation reception valid period end timer counter is not 0 (S1737: No), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1738. When the operation acceptance valid period end timer counter is 0 (S1737: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1745.

In step S1738, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the reach back button determination time timer counter for the reach back button operation effect is 0. The determination result of this step is “No” until the timing of reaching the reach (time t _{NR in} FIG. 19). When the reach back button determination time timer counter is 0 (S1738: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1739. When the reach back button determination time timer counter is not 0 (S1738: No), the process proceeds to step S1740.

In step S1739, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the value of the latest sampling signal storage unit in the effect button on-off edge signal number storage area is equal to or larger than a predetermined value. The predetermined value in this step is a value obtained by dividing a period (for example, 1 second) sufficient for determining that the effect button 35 is continuously operated (pressed and held) by 2 milliseconds. To do. If the effect button 35 is continuously operated for 1 second or longer at the timing of reaching the reach (time t _{NR in} FIG. 19), the determination result of this step is “Yes”. If the value of the latest sampling signal storage unit in the effect button on-off edge signal number storage area is less than the predetermined value (S1739: No), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1740. When the value of the latest sampling signal storage unit in the effect button on / off edge signal count storage area is equal to or greater than the predetermined value (S1739: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1745.

  In step S1740, the sub CPU 120a determines whether 1 is written in the latest sampling signal storage unit in the effect button on edge storage area. Immediately after the production button 35 is pressed, the determination result of this step is "Yes", and if the production button 35 is not pressed or is continuously operated (pressed and held), The determination result of this step is “No”. When 1 is written (S1740: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1741. When 0 is written (S1740: No), the process proceeds to step S1745.

  In step S1741, the sub CPU 120a performs an operation determination process. The operation determination process is a process of determining whether or not the current operation is successful. In the operation determination process, the sub CPU 120a obtains the time difference between the operation timing of the current operation of the effect button 35 and the timing of reach establishment. If the obtained time difference is less than the predetermined reference value, it is determined that the operation is successful and is equal to or greater than the reference value. If so, the operation fails.

  In step S1742, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether or not the determination result of the operation determination process of step S1741 is successful operation. If the operation is unsuccessful (S1742: No), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1743, and if the operation is successful (S1742: Yes), proceeds to step S1744.

  In step S1743, the sub CPU 120a sets a failure designation command indicating that the operation timing of the effect button 35 did not match the reach establishment timing in the transmission buffer, and proceeds to step S1746. This failure designation command is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output process of step S1800. The image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140, in the reach back button operation effect selection process (step S1664 in FIG. 47) at the start of the change, advance in the reach back button operation effect progress determination table (FIG. 82). When the failure designation command is received when the pattern RC13 or RC14 is determined, the image display device 31, the voice output device 32, the effect drive devices 33a and 33b, and the effect related to the display of the character image of "regret" are received. Causes the staging lighting device 34 to execute.

  In step S1744, sub CPU120a sets the success designation command indicating that the operation timing of operation of effect button 35 matches the timing of reach establishment, in the transmission buffer, and proceeds to step S1745. This success designation command is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output process of step S1800. The image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140, in the reach back button operation effect selection process (step S1664 in FIG. 47) at the start of the change, advance in the reach back button operation effect progress determination table (FIG. 82). When the pattern RC11 or RC13 is determined, when the success designation command is received, the effect (FIG. 19) related to the output of the sound of "transcendence is cute" is displayed on the image display device 31, the sound output device 32, and the effect drive device 33a. , 33b, and the effect lighting device 34.

  In step S1745, the sub CPU 120a clears the reach back button operation effect standby flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c. Then, it progresses to step S1746.

  Here, in the reach back button operation effect, for example, when the player performs a continuous hit operation (operation of pressing the effect button 35 multiple times) before and after the reach is established, among the multiple operations, If none of the operation timings matches the reach establishment timing, the processing proceeds to S1740: Yes → S1741 → S1742: No → S1743 after the processing in S1736 to S1739 each time the operation is performed. The image can be displayed. If any operation timing of a plurality of operations matches the appearance timing of the image of the effect button 35, the determination result of S1742 becomes “Yes” at that time, the process proceeds to step S1744, and the voice of “transcendence cute” is output. Can be output.

  Further, if the player keeps pressing the effect button 35 before the timing of reaching the reach, the determination result of step S1739 becomes “Yes”, the process proceeds to step S1745, and the timing operation effect standby flag is cleared. .. After the timing operation effect standby flag is cleared, the determination result of step S1736 is “No”, and regardless of the operation of the effect button 35, the display of the character image of “sorry” and the output of the sound of “transcendence cute” are also output. It will not be done.

  With such a processing flow, the effect control board 120 performs the operation on the effect button 35 a plurality of times when executing the timing operation effect, and the operation timing of any one of the plurality of operations reaches the operation timing. When it matches the timing of the establishment of "," it is possible to execute the production (the production of outputting the sound of "transcendence cute") that informs the operation result in the production mode according to the operation timing and the timing of the reach establishment. And Further, when the operation timing of any one of the plurality of operations does not match the reach establishment timing, an effect that notifies the operation result in an effect mode corresponding to the operation timing and the reach establishment timing being met The effect (character image of "regret") that controls the execution of (the effect of outputting the sound of "transcendence cute") and informs the operation result in the effect mode according to the fact that the operation timing and the timing of reach establishment did not match. It is possible to execute the effect of displaying. Further, when the operation on the effect button 35 is continuously performed for a predetermined period (1 second) including the timing of reaching the reach or longer, the execution of the effect itself for notifying the operation result is restricted. When the start timing of the continuous operation of the effect button 35 coincides with the timing of reach establishment, the effect itself for notifying the operation result can be executed.

  In step S1746 of FIG. 91, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the step-up back button operation effect standby flag is set in the step-up back button operation effect standby flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c. When the step-up back button operation effect standby flag is determined to execute the step-up back button operation effect in the step-up back button operation effect selection process (step S1665 of FIG. 47) at the start of the fluctuation, It is set. When the step-up back button operation effect standby flag is set (S1746: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1747. When the step-up back button operation effect standby flag is not set (S1746: No), the process proceeds to step S1761.

In step S1747, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the operation acceptance valid period end timer counter for the step-up back button operation effect is 0. Until the execution time of the step effect of the normal stage 4 in the step-up effect (time t _{SUP4 in} FIG. 20), the determination result of this step is “No”. When the operation reception valid period end timer counter is not 0 (S1747: No), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1748. When the operation acceptance valid period end timer counter is 0 (S1747: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1760.

In step S1748, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the step-up back button operation effect determination time (4) timer counter for the step-up back button operation effect is 0. The determination result of this step is “No” until the fourth back button operation determination timing (time t _{UR4 in} FIG. 20) of the step-up back button operation effect. If the timer counter of the step-up back button operation effect determination time (4) is not 0 (S1748: No), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1749. Step-up back button operation effect determination time (4) When the timer counter is 0 (S1748: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1752.

In step S1749, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the step-up back button operation effect determination time (3) timer counter for the step-up back button operation effect is 0. Until the third back button operation determination timing (time t _{UR3 in} FIG. 20) of the step-up back button operation effect, the determination result of this step is “No”. When the step-up back button operation effect determination time (3) timer counter is not 0 (S1749: No), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1750. Step-up back button operation effect determination time (3) When the timer counter is 0 (S1749: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1752.

In step S1750, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the step-up back button operation effect determination time (2) timer counter for the step-up back button operation effect is 0. Until the second back button operation determination timing (time t _{UR2 in} FIG. 20) of the step-up back button operation effect, the determination result of this step is “No”. If the step-up back button operation effect determination time (2) timer counter is not 0 (S1750: No), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1751. Step-up back button operation effect determination time (2) When the timer counter is 0 (S1750: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1752.

In step S1751, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the step-up back button operation effect determination time (1) timer counter for the step-up back button operation effect is 0. Until the first back button operation determination timing (time t _{UR1 in} FIG. 20) of the step-up back button operation effect, the determination result of this step is “No”. The sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1753 if the step-up back button operation effect determination time (1) timer counter is not 0 (S1751: No). Step-up back button operation effect determination time (1) When the timer counter is 0 (S1751: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1752.

In step S1752, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the value of the latest sampling signal storage unit in the effect button on-off edge signal number storage area is equal to or larger than a predetermined value. The predetermined value in this step is a value obtained by dividing a period (for example, 1 second) sufficient for determining that the effect button 35 is continuously operated (pressed and held) by 2 milliseconds. To do. Step-up back button operation decision timing (time _{t UR1, t UR2, t UR3} , or _{t UR4)} in, if it is continuously operated performance button 35 for more than 1 second, the determination result of this step is "Yes" Becomes If the value of the latest sampling signal storage unit in the effect button on-off edge signal count storage area is equal to or greater than the predetermined value (S1752: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1760. When the value of the latest sampling signal storage unit in the effect button on / off edge signal count storage area is less than the predetermined value (S1752: No), the process proceeds to step S1753.

  In step S1753, the sub CPU 120a determines whether 1 is written in the latest sampling signal storage unit in the effect button on-edge storage area. Immediately after the production button 35 is pressed, the determination result of this step is "Yes", and if the production button 35 is not pressed or is continuously operated (pressed and held), The determination result of this step is “No”. When 1 is written (S1753: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1754. When 0 is written (S1753: No), the process proceeds to step S1761.

  In step S1754, the sub CPU 120a performs an operation determination process. The operation determination process is a process of determining whether or not the current operation is successful. In the operation determination process, the sub CPU 120a obtains a time difference between the operation timing of the operation of the effect button 35 this time and each of the four back button operation determination timings, and the obtained time difference may be less than a predetermined reference value. If the value is less than the standard value, it is regarded as an operation failure.

  In step S1755, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether or not the determination result of the operation determination process of step S1754 is successful. If the operation is unsuccessful (S1755: No), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1756. When the operation is successful (S1755: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1757.

  In step S1756, sub CPU120a sets the failure designation command indicating that the operation timing of the operation of production button 35 does not match the back button operation determination timing in the transmission buffer, and proceeds to step S1761. This failure designation command is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output process of step S1800. The image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140, in the step-up back button operation effect selection process (step S1665 of FIG. 47) at the start of fluctuation of the fluctuation, in the step-up back button operation effect progress mode determination table (FIG. 84). When the failure designating command is received when the progress pattern RU13 or RU14 is determined, the image display device 31, the voice output device 32, and the drive devices 33a and 33b for effect are provided for the effect related to the display of the character image of "sorry". , And the production lighting device 34.

In step S1757, the sub CPU 120a increments the successful operation number N _UR in the back button successful operation number storage area of the sub RAM 120c by +1 to update it. Then, it progresses to step S1758.

In step S1758, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the updated number of successful operations N _UR has reached 4. If the number of successful operations N _UR has not reached 4 (S1758: No), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1759. When the number of successful operations N _UR reaches 4 (S1758: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1761.

  In step S1759, the sub CPU 120a sets a completion designation command indicating that the operation timings of the operation of the effect button 35 multiple times match all of the four back button operation determination timings in the transmission buffer, and proceeds to step S1761. .. This completion designation command is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output process of step S1800. The image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140, in the step-up back button operation effect selection process (step S1665 of FIG. 47) at the start of fluctuation of the fluctuation, in the step-up back button operation effect progress mode determination table (FIG. 84). When the progress pattern RU11 or RU13 is determined, when the success designation command is received, the effect (FIG. 20) related to the display of the character image of “Congratulations” is displayed on the image display device 31, the sound output device 32, and the drive for effect. The devices 33a and 33b and the effect lighting device 34 are made to execute.

  In step S1760, the sub CPU 120a clears the step-up back button operation effect standby flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c. Then, it progresses to step S1761.

  Here, in the step-up back button operation effect, for example, when the player performs a continuous hit operation (operation of pressing the effect button 35 a plurality of times) before and after the appearance of the image of the effect button 35, a plurality of If none of the operation timings of the times of operation coincides with the step-up back button operation determination timing, the processing of S1753: Yes → S1754 → S1755: No → S1756 is performed after each processing of S1746 to S1752. Going forward, if the current development pattern is the development pattern RU13 or RU14, the character image of "regret" can be displayed. If any operation timing of a plurality of operations matches the step-up back button operation determination timing, the determination result of S1755 is “Yes” at that time. After that, if the process proceeds from S1757 → S1758: Yes → S1759, the character image of “Congratulations” may be displayed when the present production pattern is the progress pattern RC11 or RC13.

  If the player keeps pressing the effect button 35 before the appearance of the image of the effect button 35, the determination result of step S1752 becomes “Yes”, the process proceeds to step S1760 and the step-up back button operation effect standby The flag is cleared. After the step-up back button operation effect standby flag is cleared, the determination result of step S1746 is "No", and regardless of the operation of the effect button 35, any character image of "sorry" and "congratulations" is displayed. Disappear.

  With such a processing flow, when the production control board 120 executes the step-up back button operation production, the operation on the production button 35 is performed a plurality of times, and any one of the plurality of operations is performed. When the timing matches the step-up back button operation determination timing, an effect that informs the operation result in a manner that corresponds to the operation timing and the step-up back button operation determination timing (displays the text image of "Congratulations"). Performance). Also, when the operation timing of any of the plurality of operations does not match the step-up back button operation determination timing, the operation result is displayed in the effect mode according to the operation timing and the step-up back button operation determination timing. The effect of notifying the effect (the effect of displaying the character image of "Congratulations") is regulated, and the operation result is notified in the effect mode according to the operation timing and the step-up back button operation determination timing being met (" It is possible to execute the effect of displaying the character image "." Further, when the operation on the effect button 35 is performed for a predetermined period (1 second) including the step-up back button operation determination timing or more, the execution of the effect itself informing the operation result is restricted. Further, when the start timing of the continuous operation of the effect button 35 matches the step-up back button operation determination timing, the effect itself for notifying the operation result can be executed.

  In step S1761 of FIG. 92, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the first accessory operation effect standby flag is set in the first accessory operation effect standby flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c. The first accessory operation effect standby flag is set when the symbol effect effect pattern including the first accessory operation effect is selected in the change effect pattern determination process (step S1644 in FIG. 46) at the start of the change. Is done. If the first accessory operation effect standby flag is set (S1761: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1762. When the first accessory operation effect standby flag is not set (S1761: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1767.

In step S1762, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the operation reception valid period start timer counter for the first accessory operation effect is 0. After the start time (time t _{AY1 in} FIG. 10) of the operation reception valid period for the first accessory operation effect, the determination result of this step is “Yes”. When the operation reception valid period start timer counter is 0 (S1762: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1763. When the operation reception valid period start timer counter is not 0 (S1762: No), the process proceeds to step S1767.

In step S1763, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the operation acceptance valid period end timer counter for the first accessory operation effect is 0. If it is within the operation reception effective period of the first character object operation effect (time t _{AY1 to} t _{AY2 in} FIG. 10), the determination result of this step is “No”, and the operation reception effective period of the first character object operation effect is At the end time (time t _{AY2 in} FIG. 10), the determination result of this step is “Yes”. If the operation reception valid period end timer counter is not 0 (S1763: No), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1764. When the operation acceptance valid period end timer counter is 0 (S1763: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1765.

  In step S1764, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not 1 is written in the latest sampling signal storage unit in the effect button on edge storage area. Immediately after the effect button 35 is pressed, the determination result of this step is “Yes”. When 1 is written (S1764: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1765. When 0 is written (S1764: No), the process proceeds to step S1767.

  In step S1765, sub CPU120a sets the operation result notification instruction | command command which instruct | indicates the progress to the notification of the operation result in 1st auditors product operation production, and advances to step S1766. The operation result notification designation command is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output process of step S1800. In the variation effect pattern determination process (step S1644 in FIG. 46) at the start of variation of the variation, when the symbol variation effect pattern including the first accessory operation effect with the accessory drop is selected, the image control board 150 and When the lamp control board 140 receives the operation result notification designation command, the lamp display control unit 140 displays the effect (FIG. 10A) related to the fall of the first movable accessory 330a, the image display device 31, the sound output device 32, and the effect drive device 33a. , 33b, and the effect lighting device 34.

  In step S1766, the sub CPU 120a clears the first accessory operation effect standby flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c. Then, it progresses to step S1767.

  In step S1767 of FIG. 92, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the second accessory operation effect standby flag is set in the second accessory operation effect standby flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c. The second accessory operation effect standby flag indicates that when a symbol effect effect pattern including the second accessory operation effect is selected in the change effect pattern determination process (step S1644 in FIG. 46) at the start of the change of the change, It is set. When the second accessory operation effect standby flag is set (S1767: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1768. When the second accessory operation effect standby flag is not set (S1767: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1773.

In step S1768, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the operation acceptance valid period start timer counter for the second accessory operation effect is 0. After the start time (time t _{SY2 in} FIG. 11) of the operation reception valid period for the second accessory operation effect, the determination result of this step is “Yes”. When the operation reception valid period start timer counter is 0 (S1768: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1769. When the operation reception valid period start timer counter is not 0 (S1768: No), the process proceeds to step S1773.

In step S1769, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the operation acceptance valid period end timer counter for the second accessory operation effect is 0. If it is within the operation reception valid period of the second character product operation effect (time t _{SY1 to} t _{SY2 in} FIG. 11), the determination result of this step is “No”, and the operation reception effective period of the second character object operation effect is At the end time (time t _{SY2 in} FIG. 11), the determination result of this step is “Yes”. If the operation acceptance valid period end timer counter is not 0 (S1769: No), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1770, and if the operation acceptance valid period end timer counter is 0 (S1769: Yes), proceeds to step S1771.

  In step S1770, the sub CPU 120a determines whether 1 is written in the latest sampling signal storage unit in the effect button on edge storage area. Immediately after the effect button 35 is pressed, the determination result of this step is “Yes”. When 1 is written (S1770: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1771. When 0 is not written (S1771: No), the process proceeds to step S1773.

  In step S1771, the sub CPU 120a sets an operation result notification designating command instructing the progress of the operation result in the second accessory operation effect to notification in the transmission buffer, and proceeds to step S1772. The operation result notification designation command is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output process of step S1800. In the variation effect pattern determination process at the start of variation of the variation (step S1644 in FIG. 46), when the symbol variation effect pattern including the second accessory operation effect with the accessory tilt is selected, the image control board 150 and When the lamp control board 140 receives the operation result notification designation command, the lamp display control unit 140 displays the effect (FIG. 11A) related to the tilt of the second movable accessory 330b, the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, and the effect drive device 33a. , 33b, and the effect lighting device 34.

  In step S1772, the sub CPU 120a clears the second accessory operation effect standby flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c. Then, it progresses to step S1773.

In step S1773 of FIG. 93, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the operation reception valid period start timer counter for promotion effect is zero. After the start time (time t _{RDS in} FIG. 21) of the operation acceptance valid period of the repeated hit effect in the promotion effect, the determination result of this step is “Yes”. When the operation reception valid period start timer counter is 0 (S1773: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1774. When the operation reception valid period start timer counter is not 0 (S1773: No), the process proceeds to step S1784.

In step S1774, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the operation reception valid period end timer counter for promotion effect is zero. If it is within the operation acceptance valid period of the continuous hit operation of promotion production (time t _{RDS to} t _{RDE in} FIG. 21), the determination result of this step is “No”, and the end time of the operation acceptance valid period of the continuous hit operation (FIG. 21). At time t _RDE ), the determination result of this step is “Yes”. When the operation reception valid period end timer counter is not 0 (S1774: No), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1775. When the operation acceptance valid period end timer counter is 0 (S1774: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1780.

  In step S1775, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the value of the latest sampling signal storage unit in the effect button on-off edge signal number storage area is equal to or larger than a predetermined value. The predetermined value in this step is a value obtained by dividing a period (for example, 1 second) that is sufficient to determine that the effect button 35 is continuously operated (pressed and held) by 2 milliseconds. To do. If the effect button 35 is continuously operated (pressed and held) for 1 second or longer, the determination result of this step is “Yes”. If the value of the latest sampling signal storage unit in the effect button on-off edge signal count storage area is less than the predetermined value (S1775: No), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1776. When the value of the latest sampling signal storage unit in the effect button on / off edge signal count storage area is equal to or greater than the predetermined value (S1775: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1784.

  In step S1776, the sub CPU 120a determines whether 1 is written in the latest sampling signal storage unit of the effect button on edge storage area. Immediately after the effect button 35 is pressed, the determination result of this step is “Yes”. When 1 is written (S1776: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1777. When 0 is written (S1776: No), the process proceeds to step S1784.

In step S1777, the sub CPU 120a updates the number of consecutive hits N _RD of the consecutive hit number storage area of the sub RAM 120c by +1. Then, it progresses to step S1778.

In step S1778, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the updated number of consecutive hits N _RD has reached 30. If the number of times the effect button 35 has been pressed after the guide image of "repeatedly hit!" Has reached 30 times, the determination result of this step is "Yes", and if it has not reached 30 times, this step The determination result is “No”. If the number of consecutive hits N _RD has not reached 30 (S1778: No), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1779. When the number of consecutive hits N _RD reaches 30 (S1778: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1780.

  In step S1779, sub CPU120a sets the effect progress designation command in the transmission buffer, and proceeds to step S1783. This effect progress designation command is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output process of step S1800. Upon receiving the effect progress designation command, the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 execute the effect of advancing the gauge progress amount of the gauge image to the right by a predetermined amount.

  In step S1780, it is determined whether the promotion success production standby flag is set in the promotion success production standby flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c. The promotion success production standby flag is set at the start of the round game of the fourth round in the special game of 8R probability variation jackpot. If the promotion success effect standby flag is set (S1780: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1781. When the promotion success effect standby flag is not set (S1780: No), the process proceeds to step S1784.

  In step S1781, the sub CPU 120a sets the promotion failure effect designating command instructing the execution of the promotion failure effect in the transmission buffer, and proceeds to step S1784. The promotion failure effect designation command is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output process of step S1800. When the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 receive the promotion failure production designation command, the promotion failure production (FIG. 21B) is displayed on the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, and the production drive devices 33a and 33b. And the production lighting device 34.

  In step S1782, the sub CPU 120a sets the promotion success effect designation command instructing execution of the promotion success effect in the transmission buffer, and proceeds to step S1783. The promotion success effect designation command is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output process of step S1800. Upon receiving the promotion success effect designation command, the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 send the promotion success effect (FIG. 21A) to the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, and the drive devices 33a, 33b for effect. And the production lighting device 34.

  In step S1783, the sub CPU 120a clears the promotion effect standby flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c. Then, it progresses to step S1784.

  In step S1784, the sub CPU 120a generates an operation designation command corresponding to the operation of the effect button 35, the cross key 39, or the center key 39E, and sets the generated operation designation command in the transmission buffer. This operation designation command is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output process of step S1800. Upon receiving the operation designation command, the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 execute the effect according to the operation of the effect button 35, the cross key 39, or the center key 39E.

The above is the details of the present embodiment. According to this embodiment, the following effects can be obtained.
First, in the present embodiment, a plurality of types of operation effects (first accessory operation effect, second accessory operation effect, dialogue operation effect, roulette operation) that progress to the notification of the operation result when the operation of the effect button 35 is performed. Effects, gauge operation effects, timing operation effects), and one or more of these effects are executed as symbol variation effects. Further, among the plurality of types of operation effects, in the first accessory operation effect, the second accessory operation effect, the serif operation effect, the roulette operation effect, and the gauge operation effect, the jackpot determination result and the progress after the operation of the effect button 35 are performed. Regardless of the mode, a common normal notice effect (effect for displaying a guide image or an indicator image for prompting the operation of the effect button 35) is executed, and thereafter, the first character object operation effect and the second character object operation are performed. Individual specific advance notice effects can be executed according to the manner of notifying the operation results of the effect, the dialogue operation effect, the roulette operation effect, and the gauge operation effect. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the operation effect.

  Secondly, in the present embodiment, the effect control board 120, during the variable display of the symbols, is a roulette operation effect that is easily selected when the jackpot determination result is not a big hit among effects of a plurality of types of effect modes of the roulette operation effect ( Roulette rolls are "!" And effects that are difficult to select when the jackpot determination result is not a big hit among the effects of the plurality of types of effect modes of the first accessory operation effect (the effect with the drop of the accessory). 1 role object operation effect), before executing the effect button 35 in the roulette operation effect, it is restricted to execute a specific notice effect indicating a mode of progress of the effect after the operation, and the first character effect. Before the operation of the effect button 35 in the operation effect, it is possible to execute the specific notice effect indicating the mode of development of the effect after the operation. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to further enhance the enjoyment of the game in the case where both the first accessory operation effect and the roulette operation effect are executed during the variable display of the symbols.

  Thirdly, in the present embodiment, the effect control board 120 is easily selected when the jackpot determination result is not a big hit among the effects of a plurality of types of the effect mode of the serif operation effect during the variable display of the symbols ( Characters A, B, and C are the dialogue act productions in which the speaker is a speaker, and the productions that are difficult to be selected when the jackpot determination result is not a big hit among the productions of a plurality of types of production modes of the first accessory operation productions (feature fall). If there is a certain first accessory operation effect), before executing the effect button 35 in the dialogue operation effect, it is restricted to execute a specific notice effect indicating a mode of development of the effect after the operation, and Before the operation of the effect button 35 in the one accessory operation operation, it is possible to execute the specific notice effect indicating the mode of development of the effect after the operation. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to further enhance the enjoyment of the game in the case where both the first accessory operation effect and the dialogue operation effect are executed during the variable display of the symbols.

  Fourthly, in the present embodiment, the effect control board 120 is a roulette operation effect that is easily selected when the jackpot determination result is not a big hit among the effects of a plurality of types of roulette operation effects during variable display of symbols ( Roulette is a serif operation effect with "!") And effects that are difficult to be selected when the jackpot determination result is not a jackpot among the effects of multiple types of gauge operation effects (a gauge operation with a final score of 8000 or more). Effect), before executing the effect button 35 in the roulette operation effect, it is restricted to execute the specific notice effect indicating the mode of the development of the effect after the operation, and the effect button 35 in the gauge operation effect is controlled. Before the operation, it is possible to execute a specific notice effect indicating a mode of the effect development after the operation. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the game when the gauge operation effect and the roulette operation effect are both executed during the variable display of the symbols.

  Fifthly, in the present embodiment, the effect control board 120, during the variable display of the symbols, is a serif operation effect that is easily selected when the jackpot determination result is not a big hit among the effects of a plurality of types of effect modes of the serif operation effect ( Characters A, B, and C are the dialogue speakers, and effects that are difficult to select when the jackpot determination result is not a big hit among the effects of multiple types of gauge operation effects (final acquisition points are 8000 or more). Of the gauge operation effect) is performed before the operation of the effect button 35 in the dialogue operation effect, the execution of the specific notice effect indicating the mode of the progress of the effect after the operation is restricted, and the effect in the gauge operation effect is controlled. Before the operation of the button 35, it is possible to execute a specific notice effect indicating a mode of the effect development after the operation. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to further enhance the enjoyment of the game when the gauge operation effect and the dialogue operation effect are both executed during the variable display of the symbols.

<Second Embodiment>
Next, a second embodiment of the present invention will be described.
In the first embodiment, when the gauge operation effect is executed as an effect that can progress to the stage of 8000 points or more, it is possible to execute the specific notice effect before the execution of the gauge operation effect, and the stage of 8000 points or more. When a gauge operation effect is executed as an effect that cannot progress to a point, execution of the specific notice effect is restricted before execution of the gauge operation effect. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 95 (d), as the effect that the final acquisition point is either the big hit confirmed eye, 7777 or 3333 (7777 in the example of FIG. 95 (d)). When the gauge operation effect is executed, it is possible to execute the specific notice effect before the execution of the gauge operation effect, and in other cases, it is restricted to execute the specific notice effect before the execution of the gauge operation effect. ..

  The contents of the gauge operation specific notice execution determination table referred to in step S1662-1 of the gauge operation specific notice production selection process (FIG. 76) are different between the first embodiment and the present embodiment. FIG. 96 is a diagram showing a gauge operation specific announcement execution determination table. In the gauge operation specific advance notice effect execution determination table of the present embodiment, a set of data indicating the effect random number 21 and the necessity of execution (“execute” and “do not execute”) is the final stage determination process (FIG. 70). In step S1660-3), the reference is made when 7777 is the final acquisition point, the reference is made when 3333 is the final acquisition point, and the reference is made at other times. Remembered

  Specifically, as for 7777, 55 pieces (0 to 54) of the random number values for production 21 are data indicating that the gauge operation specific notice production is executed, and 45 pieces (55 to 99) of the random number values for production. 21 is respectively associated with data indicating that the gauge operation specific notice effect is not executed. As for 3333, data indicating that 20 (0 to 19) random number values for production 21 execute the gauge operation specific announcement production, and 80 (20 to 99) production random number values 21 are used for gauge operation specific announcement. It is associated with data indicating that the effect is not executed. Regarding points that are neither 7777 nor 33333, 100 (0 to 99) random number values for production 21 are associated with data indicating that the gauge operation specific announcement production is not executed. Regarding points that are neither 7777 nor 3333, even one random number 21 for effect is not associated with the data indicating that the gauge operation specific notice effect is executed.

  With such a configuration of the table, when performing the gauge operation performance, the production control board 120 operates the production button 35 in the gauge operation production when it is supposed to stop at the symbol corresponding to the jackpot in the variable display. It is possible to execute a specific notice effect indicating the mode of progress after the operation. In addition, when it is supposed to stop at the symbol corresponding to the loss in the variable display, before the operation of the effect button 35 in the gauge operation effect, the specific notice effect indicating the mode of progress after the operation is executed. Regulate.

  The above is the details of the present embodiment. According to the present embodiment, it is possible to further enhance the enjoyment of the game when executing the gauge operation effect during the variable display of the symbols.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, a third embodiment of the present invention will be described. In the first and second embodiments, when the second accessory operation effect is executed, the specific notice effect can be executed regardless of whether the jackpot determination result is a big hit or a loss. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, whether or not to execute the specific notice effect is changed according to the jackpot determination result.

  In the first and second embodiments and the present embodiment, the contents of the second accessory specifying notice effect execution determination table referred to in step S1652-1 of the second accessory specifying notice effect selection process (FIG. 57) are as follows. different. FIG. 97 is a diagram showing a second accessory specific preliminary announcement effect execution determination table. In the second accessory specifying preliminary announcement effect execution determination table of the present embodiment, a set of data indicating the effect random number value 6 and the necessity of execution (“execute” and “do not execute”) is developed as a jackpot decision result. It is stored separately for each corresponding to the combination of presence or absence of.

  For combinations in which the jackpot determination result in this table is lost and has developed, 100 (0 to 99) random numbers 6 for effect are associated with data indicating that the specific notice effect is not executed. In addition, for combinations in which the jackpot determination result is lost and has not been developed, 100 (0 to 99) random numbers 6 for effect are associated with data indicating that the specific notice effect is not executed. If the jackpot determination result is a loss, no one of the effect random numbers 6 is associated with the data indicating that the specific notice effect is executed.

  With such a configuration of the table, the effect control board 120, when executing the second accessory operation effect, is to stop at the symbol corresponding to the jackpot in the variable display, the second accessory operation effect. Before the operation of the effect button 35 in, the specific notice effect indicating the mode of progress after the operation can be executed. Further, when it is supposed to stop at the symbol corresponding to the loss in the variable display, before the operation of the effect button 35 in the second accessory operation effect, the specific notice effect indicating the mode of progress after the operation is executed. Regulate what is done.

  The above is the details of the present embodiment. According to the present embodiment, it is possible to further enhance the enjoyment of the game when executing the gauge operation effect during the variable display of the symbols.

  Although the first to third embodiments of the present invention have been described above, the following modifications may be added to the embodiments.

(1) In the first to third embodiments, the number of appearance timings of images of the effect buttons 35 in the timing operation effects (timing of pressing the effect buttons 35) is four. However, the number of appearance timings of the image of the effect button 35 may be three or less, or may be five or more.

(2) In the first to third embodiments described above, the number of back button operation determination timings in the step-up back button operation effect is four. However, the number of back button operation determination timings may be three or less, or five or more.

(3) In the above-described first to third embodiments, the SP reach effect and the SPSP reach effect are developed from the normal reach effect. However, an effect that develops from the normal reach effect to the SP reach effect and develops from the SP reach effect to the SPSP reach effect may be executed as the symbol variation effect.

(4) In the promotion effects of the above-described first to third embodiments, the notification condition is that the repeated hit operation is performed within the operation acceptance valid period of the repeated hit operation, and the number of consecutive hits within the operation acceptance valid period is the predetermined number (30). When the number of times reached), the progress was made to the promotion success production or promotion failure production. On the other hand, within the operation acceptance valid period, a plurality of consecutive hit determination timings are provided, and the effect button 35 is pressed at all or a part of the plurality of consecutive hit determination timings (the effect button on edge at the consecutive hit determination timings. When the value of the latest sampling signal storage unit in the storage area is 1, the promotion success production or the promotion failure production may be performed. Further, in this case, when the operation timing of the operation of the effect button 35 and the continuous hit determination timing match, the effect of notifying the operation result in an effect mode corresponding to the match between the operation timing and the continuous hit determination timing (for example, " When the operation timing of the operation of the effect button 35 and the continuous hit determination timing do not match, the effect corresponding to the operation timing and the continuous hit determination timing not matching. It is possible to execute an effect in which the operation result is notified in a form (for example, an effect of displaying the character image "No"), and the operation on the effect button 35 is continuously performed for a predetermined period including the continuous hit determination timing or longer. In the event that the operation result is notified, for example, a character image of “Don Pisha” or “No” is displayed. Out, promoted successful performance, and may be to restrict the execution of one or more of production) in the promotion failing game effect.

(6) In the timing operation effects of the first to third embodiments, the value of the latest sampling signal storage unit in the effect button on-off edge signal number storage area at the appearance timing of the image of the effect button 35 is equal to or greater than the predetermined value. In this case, it is considered that the effect button 35 has been continuously operated for a predetermined period including the appearance timing of the image of the effect button 35, and execution of the operation result effect is restricted. However, the value of the latest sampling storage unit of the effect button sampling signal storage area is 1 at two timings, which are slightly before the appearance timing of the image of the effect button 35 and the appearance timing of the image of the effect button 35. In this case, it may be considered that the effect button 35 has been continuously operated for a predetermined period including the appearance timing of the image of the effect button 35, and the execution of the operation result effect may be restricted.

(7) In the reach back button operation effects of the first to third embodiments, when the value of the latest sampling signal storage unit in the effect button on-off edge signal number storage area at the timing of reach establishment is equal to or greater than a predetermined value. In addition, it is considered that the effect button 35 has been continuously operated for a predetermined period including the timing of reach establishment, and execution of the operation result effect is restricted. However, if the value of the latest sampling storage section of the effect button sampling signal storage area is 1 at two timings slightly before the timing at which the reach is established and at the timing at which the reach is established, the reach is established. It may be considered that the effect button 35 has been continuously operated for a predetermined period including the timing, and the execution of the operation result effect may be restricted.

(8) In the step-up back button operation effects of the first to third embodiments, the value of the latest sampling signal storage unit in the effect button on-off edge signal number storage area at the appearance timing of the image of the effect button 35 is a predetermined value. When it is above, it is considered that the effect button 35 is continuously operated for a predetermined period including the step-up back button operation determination timing, and execution of the operation result effect is restricted. However, when the value of the latest sampling storage unit in the effect button sampling signal storage area is 1 at two timings slightly before the step-up back button operation determination timing and the step-up back button operation determination timing, Alternatively, it may be considered that the effect button 35 is continuously operated for a predetermined period including the step-up back button operation determination timing, and the execution of the operation result effect may be restricted.

(9) In the first accessory operation effect of the first to third embodiments, the specific notice effect may be executed after the first accessory operation effect is started and the operation acceptance valid period is started. It was the previous time. However, the execution time of the specific announcement effect of the first _accessory operation effect may be before the start of execution of the first _accessory operation effect itself during the variable display of the symbol (before the time t _AY0 in FIG. 10).

(10) It is after the start of the second accessory operation effect that the specific notice effect may be executed in the second accessory operation effect of the first to third embodiments, and the operation acceptance valid period starts. It was the previous time. However, the execution time of the specific announcement effect of the second accessory operation effect may be before the start of execution of the second accessory operation effect itself during the variable display of the symbol (before the time t _SY0 in FIG. 11).

(11) In the dialog operation effects of the first to third embodiments, the specific notice effect may be executed after the start of the dialog operation effect and before the start of the operation reception valid period. .. However, the execution time of the specific notice effect of the dialogue operation effect may be before the execution start of the dialogue operation effect itself during the variable display of the symbol (before the time _tSR0 in FIG. 15).

(12) In the roulette operation effect of the first to third embodiments, the specific notice effect may be executed after the start of the roulette operation effect and before the start of the operation reception valid period. . However, the execution time of the specific notice effect of the roulette operation effect may be before the start of execution of the roulette operation effect itself during the variable display of the symbol (before the time t _LR0 in FIG. 16).

(13) In the gauge operation effects of the first to third embodiments, the specific notice effect may be executed after the start of the gauge operation effects and before the start of the operation reception valid period. .. However, the execution time of the specific notice effect of the gauge operation effect may be before the execution start of the gauge operation effect itself during the variable display of the symbol (before the time t _GG0 in FIG. 17).

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Gaming machine, 2 ... Gaming board, 14 ... 1st starting opening, 14a ... 1st starting opening detection switch, 15 ... 2nd starting opening, 15a ... 2nd starting opening detection switch, 16 ... 1st big winning opening, 16a ... 1st big winning opening detection switch, 17 ... 2nd big winning opening, 17a ... 2nd big winning opening detection switch, 20 ... 1st special symbol display device, 21 ... 2nd special symbol display device, 31 ... Image display Device, 110 ... Main control board, 110a ... Main CPU, 110b ... Main ROM, 110c ... Main RAM, 120 ... Production control board, 120a ... Sub CPU, 120b ... Sub ROM, 120c ... Sub RAM, 150 ... Image control board

Claims (1)

Operation means,
Judgment means for judging whether or not the jackpot is won by the establishment of the start condition,
Based on the determination result of the determination means, after the symbols are variably displayed in the symbol display means, a symbol display control means for stopping and displaying the symbols indicating the determination results,
When the determination means determines that the jackpot is won, after the symbol display control means stops and displays the symbol, a special game execution means for executing a special game corresponding to the jackpot won,
Based on the determination result of the determination means, a predetermined reach effect, a development effect that develops from the reach effect, and a first operation effect that progresses in response to a predetermined operation on the operation means within the operation reception valid period, and Production control means for causing the production means to execute one or a plurality of productions among the plurality of productions including the second operation production and the specific notice production which suggests the mode of the development of the production after the operation;
When the effect control means executes the first operation effect during the variable display of the symbols, the specific advance notification effect is given before the execution of the first operation effect depending on the mode of the effect development after the operation. There are times when it can be executed and times when it is restricted, and when executing the second operation effect, it is possible to execute the specific notice effect before the execution of the second operation effect. And the regulation means to
The second operation effect is a notification condition that a predetermined operation is performed on the operation means within the operation reception effective period, and immediately after the predetermined operation within the operation reception effective period, the second operation effect is displayed. Ri blow operation director der to inform the development,
When the determination means determines that the jackpot has been won, the restriction means causes the specific notice effect to be executed before the execution of the first operation effect, or the execution of the second operation effect before the execution of the second operation effect. When it is determined that the determination means determines that the jackpot has not been won, it is possible to execute the specific announcement effect before the execution of the second operation effect, and A game machine characterized in that it is impossible to execute the specific notice effect before the execution of the first operation effect .